Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.89 MB, 172 trang )
<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>
Pre date:18/8
Teaching date: 20/8
- Hepl Ss have general knowledge of a new subject and know how to study EL 6. Ss
know the contents of the “ Tieng Anh 6”.
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will able to understand Sth about EL,know how to
learn English effectively, know the content of “Tieng Anh 6”.
<b> * Knowledge:</b>
To present the subject, student book, homework book, the way how to learn
English
<b> * Skill:</b>
Speaking, listening .
<b>B. Teaching procedure:</b>
<b> I/ Preparation:</b>
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,text book, work book.
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.
<b> </b> <b>II. Checking: -Not check</b>
<b> C/ New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Sơ lược về môn Tiếng Anh và SGK</b>(10ms <b>)</b>
How many units are there in English book?
Presents how many lessons in each unit
EL là ngôn ngữ phổ biến nhất trên thế giới hiện
nay…
<b>2.Cấu trúc SGK Tiếng Anh 6(10ms)</b>
- T asks Ss to open their books.
T introduces the strucsture of the “Tieng Anh 6”.
- Sách gồm 16 đơn vị bài học (16 unit)
Mỗi bài gồm 2-3 phần(A-B-C).
3.Giới thiệu cách học môn Tiếng Anh:
- T introduces to Ss some ways of learning EL.
* <b>Present the class statements(10ms) </b>
There are 16 units
From 5 to 6 lessons
Repeat in chorus
- Ss open the book
Do following teacher statements
- Listen and give ideas.
- Take notes( Ss discuss in
-Teacher statements:
+ Stand up, please
+ Go to the board, please
+ Come back your seat, please.
+ Write down, please
+ Hand up, please
+ Keep silent, please
+ Repeat/ again Listen and repeat
+ Give me some examples
+ Learn by heart vocabulary
+ Answer the questions
<b>Gives the class regulations:(5ms)</b>
(By Vietnamese)
Asks the students to rebuild the class regulations
- Listen and copy down
- Copy down on the
notebook
<b>III. Consolidation:(5)</b>
Asks them to learn by heart the class|<sub> statements</sub>
<b>IV. Homework:(3ms)</b>
<b>-</b> Learn by heart all old structures grammar
<b>-</b> Preparing new lesson : Unit 1 (A1-4)
Pre date:19/8
Teaching date: 21/8
Period 2.
<b>A/The aims and Objectives:</b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, ss are able to use “Hi, Hello”, “I’m / My name’s …,
to know greeting each other and introduce theirselves (name), Numbering from 0 to 5,to
introduce themselves correctly and fluently. Threy use numbers from 0 to 5 to count.
* Knowledge:
<b>To present: - Hello/ Hi / I am ..../ My name is...to introduce yourself</b>
<b> -Number 0-5</b>
* Skill: - Develop 4 skills: L,S R,&W.
<b>B/Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I/ Organization: </b>
<b>-</b> Greeting(1m)
<b>-</b> Check attendance
<b> II/ Preparation:</b>
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.
<b> </b> <b>III/ Checking: -Not check</b>
<b> C/ New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation1 (10ms)</b>
<b>+ Pre teach: (vocabulary)</b>
<b>-</b> T. Elicits vocabulary
<b>-</b> Present these vocabulary:
Hello: Xin chào (Translation)
Hi: Xin chào(Translation)
Name: Tên(Translation)
Is/ Am: Thì,Là, ở (Translation)
I: tơi, tớ, mình(Translation)
+Checking: R.O.R
+Dialogue build:T set the scene: Lan is talking
to Nga,Ba is talking to Nam.
-T elicits the dialogue.
a.Lan: Hi, I am Lan
Nga: Hi, I am Nga
b.Ba: Hello, My name is Ba
Nam: Hello, My name is Nam
- T asks Ss to fill in the blank.
- T Helps Ss practice dialogue in pairs
<b>2. Presentation (15ms)A2,4(11)</b>
- T asks Ss to work in groups of 4, Ss greet &
introduce themselves. T checks some pairs.
* Presentation 2:
1.Vocabulary:
+ Pre teach: Present number 0-5:
<b>-</b> Oh: 0/ - One:1
- Two:2/ - Three: 3
- Four: 4/ - Five: 5
+Checking: Slap the board.
<b>3.Practice:(15)</b>
+Dictation:T reads: Oh- Five- One- Two-
Four….
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually
Copy down
SS play a game – work in pair
Ss work in pair to introduce yourself
for example:
Hi, I am Lan
SS listen and repeat in chorus and
individually
And then copy down on their
notebooks
-SS work in group: A-B
-Each group has 6 students
Write the letter on their notebook in
teacher|<sub>s order.</sub>
Keys:
+ Hi.I’m <b>Lan</b>
+ Hello.My name’s <b>Ba</b>
<b> </b>
<b>Yên Bái</b>
029
<b>Hue 054</b>
<b>Quang Trị</b>
<b>053</b> <b>Da Nang</b>
<b>0511</b>
<b>Ha Noi</b>
<b>04</b>
<i><b>Hai Phong</b></i>
+Words cue drill:
Use some words cue to write telephone
numbers
And make a dialogue:
<b> T: Quang Ninh, please.</b>
<b> S: Oh- Three- Three</b>
-T asks –Students anwer in chorus
-Calls some pairs to act out.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation 1(10ms)</b>
+ Pre teach:Vocabulary:- T elicits words
<b>-</b> Present these vocabulary:
<b>-</b> Fine, thanks: khoẻ , cảm ơn(meaning)
<b>-</b> Miss: Cơ (meaning) (chưa có gia đình)
<b>-</b> Mrs:Bà (meaning)
<b>-</b> Mr : ông, ngài.( đặt trước tên người đàn
ông)
<b>+Checking</b>: What and where:
<b>1.</b> <b>Asks and answer about the health.</b>
-T sets the scene: Lan goes to school and meets
Ba. She greats him. T elicit the dialogue.
+R O R dialogue:
a.Lan: Hi, Lan
Nga: Hi, Nga
<b>+ Model sentence: </b>How are you?
I am fine, thank you
<b>2.</b> <b>Practice:(20ms)</b>
*A6(12): - T elicits 2 pics, asks Ss to make
similar dialogue in pairs.
- Then T checks some pairs.
* A7(13): T asks Ss to fill in the gaps to make
a completed dialogue between Nam and Lan.
- T checks some pairs and corrects mistakes.
SS listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
And then copy down on their notebook
Work in group
Work in pairs to ask and answer the
questions:
+ How are you?
+ I am fine.
-Practice with a partner .
T: How are you?
S:...
-Go to the boarb and write down the
old numbers( one by one).
<b>• Presentation 2:</b>
+Revision numbers from 0 to 5:
+ Pre teach: Present number 6 to 10:
<b>-</b> Six: 6 - Seven: 7
<b>-</b> Eight: 8 - Nine: 9 - Ten: 10
+Checking: matching
* Practice: + Dictation:-T. reads some
telephone numbers.
Asks students to listen and write down by
English these telephone numbers: 820.029 /
950.443 / 22.653 / 621.590 / 510.682 /
768.527.
<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>+Work
<b>- Then T controls and corects.</b>
<b>F</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b>
<b>I</b> <b>N</b> <b>I</b> <b>N</b> <b>e</b>
<b>V</b> <b>T</b> <b>G</b> <b>X</b> <b>n</b>
<b>E</b> <b>w</b> <b>H</b> <b>O</b> <b>o</b>
<b>G</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b> <b>l</b>
<b>T</b> <b>F</b> <b>O</b> <b>U</b> <b>r</b>
<b>s</b> <b>i</b> <b>x</b> <b>v</b> <b>n</b>
<b>s</b> <b>e</b> <b>v</b> <b>e</b> <b>n</b>
-Repeat in chorus and individial
-Work in pairs.Listen to teacher and
slap the word that they hear).
- Students to listen and write down by
English these telephone numbers
Write down the words that they hear
on their notebooks.
Work in group(2 groups)
-Go to the boarb and circle the word
that they find on the work square.
Anwer key:
Five, Two, Eight, Ten<sub></sub>
Nine, Ten, Four, One<sub></sub>
One<sub></sub>
Seven<sub></sub>
Six<sub></sub>
<b>III.Consolidation:(3ms)- How to ask &answer about health</b>
Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-10
<b>IV.Homework:(2ms)Do the numbers3,4 page 5(Homework book).</b>
-Learn by heart vocab,numbers,the ways to asks & answer about the health.
-Ss revise numbers from 0 to 10.
- Pepare for next lesson.
V. Evaluation<b> : </b>
………
………
………
………
Pre date:20/8
Teaching date:22/8
Period 3
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use “Good afternoon / good morning/ bye”
to greet one another and count- Write numbers from 10 to 15 correctly and fluently.
- T Helps Ss develop 4 skills (Develop’s Ss speaking skill.)
<b> *Knowledge:</b>
<b>To present: - Good morning/ good afternoon to greet each other/Number 11 to 15.</b>
<b> B/Preparation:</b>
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,picture cues(4), Cards(5)
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks.
<b>C/Procedure:</b>
<b>I. Organization: (1m) – Greeting & Check attendance</b>
<b>II. Checking up: (5ms)</b>
a)T asks S1 to write how to ask and answer about the health on the bb. And then read
aloud.
b) T asks S2 write numbers from 6 to 10 and then read aloud.
<b>Keys:a) S1- Hi. How are you? b) 6.six /7.seven / 8.eight / 9.nine / </b>
10.ten.
S2 – I’m fine, thanks. And you?
S1- Fine ,thanks.
<b>-</b> T corrects and gives marks
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation (10ms)</b>
+ Pre teach: Present these vocabulary:
Good morning:Chào(Buổi sáng)- picture
-visual
Good afternoon:Chào(Buổi chiều) )- picture
Good everning:Chào(Buôỉ tối) )-
explaination
Good night:chúc ngủ ngon- Meaning- trans
Good bye:Chào tạm biệt ( Mine- Situation)
Children:Trẻ em( picture- visual)
We: (pro) chúng tôi, chúng tớ, chúng ta(ngôi 1
số nhiều- situation)
+Checking: R & R.
<b>2.Practice:(5ms)</b>( B1,2(14,15)
*:T elicits 5 pictures B1& helps Ss practise
greeting one another in pairs.
Eg: S1- Good morning ! S2- Good morning !
Picture drill.
-T runs through the pictures.
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually
Copy down
Work individually
-Go to the board and write down.
- work in pairs
<b>-</b> Ss listen.
-Read in chorus, Half – half, T- Ss,
groups of table or groups of 3.
-Work in pairs
<b>*B3(P15)(5ms)</b>:Presentation dialogue - T sets
the scene: Miss Hoa is talking to her Ss.
T helps Ss read dialogue (a) P 15 in chorus,
T-wc, S-S,Groups of 3,or groups of table…
-T asks Ss to translate dialogue in to vietnamese
(Note:We are = We’re).
<b>*B4(P16) (4ms)*</b>Practice:T sets the scene: Lan
meets Nga when she goes to school.
- T asks Ss to fill in the gaps.Then T checks
some pairs. T gives answer keys.
<b>*.Practice:(6ms)</b>- T elicits numbers from 11 to
15
+Word cues drill :Run through the cues, asks Ss
calculate & give result s.Let’s practise in pairs.
-T gets feedback .
Eleven: 11 / Twelve: 12 / Thirteen: 13
Fourteen:14 / Fifteen: 15
<b>3.Further practice:(5ms)</b>
+Dictation: Teacher reads: Six, twelve, two, five,
thirteen, eight, eleven, four,fourteen, seven, ten,
fifteen, one, three, oh, nine
S1: Good (morning)
S2: Good (morning)
<b>-</b> Ss translate dialogue in to
vietnamese
-Work in pairs following example
exchange:
S1: Seven and eight?
S2: Fifteen
*keys:
+ Nga: Good afternoon,Lan.
+ Nga: I’m fine, thanks
<b>-</b> Practice in pairs.
<b>-</b> Listen and repeat in chorus
<b>-</b> Ss work individually to read
numbers from 0 to 15 in the
following ways:
+ oh,one,two,three..
+ oh, two,four,six…
+ one, three,five,seven…
<b>-</b> Ss listen and write. Work
individually.
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms): - Asks Ss sums up the main contents of the lesson: “ to great one</b>
another, numbers from 0 to 15”
<b>IV.Homework:(1ms) : </b>
-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-15 & vocabulary.
-Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).Prepare for next lesson.
9+2
10 + 2
7+8
5+6
6+8
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………...
<b> ________________________________________________</b>
Pre date:...
Teaching date:...
<b>Period 4,5,6</b>
<b>Unit 1: Greetings</b>
<b>Lesson 4: How old are you?</b>
<b>A/The aim and Objectives:</b>
<b>I.The aims: </b>
- Help Ss use “ How old are you?- I’m …” to talk about ages, count & write numbers
from 16 to 20. Develop 4 skills.
<b>II.The objectives:</b>
-By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to use “How old are you? – I’m + ages.”
To talk about the ages and contrast with “ How are you?”.
- Ss can count from 16 to 20 correctly and fluently
- Develop’s Ss speaking and reading skill.
<b> *Knowledge:</b>
To present: -“How old are you” to talk about age and contrast with “How are
you”
-Number 16 to 20
<b> B/Preparation:</b>
- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,picture cues,Cards(2)
<b>C/Procedure:</b>
<b>I. Organization: (1m) – Greeting & Check attendance</b>
<b>II. Checking up: (5ms)</b> nine
-T asks S1 to write vocabulary on board. eight
- T asks other Ss to write numbers: network three
<b>* Keys: + vocabulary of last lesson.</b>
+ Numbers: one, two,three,… four one
<b>-</b> T corrects and gives marks.
<b>III.New lesson:</b> eleven (…)
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation (10ms)</b>
+ Pre teach:
Present numbers:
Sixteen: 16 / Seventeen: 17
10
’
Listen and repeat in chorus and
works individially
Copy down
<b> Numbers </b>
Eighteen: 18 / Nineteen: 19 / Twenty: 20
<b>-</b> Retell the numbers from 0 to 15.
+Checking: Slap the boarb.
<b>* C3(P18):</b>
<b>+ Presentation</b>: -T sets the scene: Nga & Lan
meet their teacher, Mrs Hoa.Ba meets Phong 1st
time.
- Ss listen to the dialogue and read silently.
T helps Ss practise dialogue : T-S; Ss-Ss;
pairs…
-T gives instructions.
Teacher contrast with “ How are you?”
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
<i><b>How old are you? </b></i>
<i><b> I am (12) years old</b></i>
-T concept check meaning, form…
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
<b>a)</b>Pelmanism:- T. runs through the cards.
-T finds out the winner.
A B C D E
<b> Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen </b>
<b>Twenty</b>
a b c d e
16 17 18 19 20
<b>* Practice:</b>
- Word cue drill.
T runs through the cues.
16 17 18 19 20…
-T models: T: How old are you?
S: I’m <b>/12/</b>
-T helps Ss practise speaking
:T-Ss;Ss-Ss;pairs...
<b>3.Further practice</b>:(8ms:)
<b>*C5 P. 19</b>
-T guides Ss to play: “bingo”(Number 0-20)
Teacher reads : 10, 7, 19, 20, 6/ 8, 11,13, 15, 0/
20
’
8’
4’
Work individially
-Go to the boarb and write down
-Ss play the game with two teams.
- Translate in to Vietnamese .
-Work in pairs
-Work in group to find the words
with the number
-Work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions
-Write the number after listening.
-Work in individially
<b>-</b> Listen and repeat in chorus.
16, 12, 1, 17, 3/ 5,4,2,18,15/ …..
-T finds out the winner.
-Let Ss draw a square with numbers: 0-20.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation (10ms)</b>
+Checking: Slap the boarb:
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
<b>a)Pelmanism</b>:- T. runs through the cards.
-T finds out the winner.
A B C D E
<b> Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen</b>
<b>Twenty</b>
d c e b a
16 17 18 19
20
<b>b)jumbled words</b>:
+ ETGIH= eight + THRTENIE=
thirteen
+TW EELV= twelve +
EELVEN=eleven
+ TWNETY=twenty +FOTEENUR=
fourteen
+S EEVN= seven
+NIETENEN=nineteen
-T asks Ss to rearrange the letters to make
the words meaningful.T devides Ss in to 2
teams.
T checks the words and finds out the winner
<b>* Guessing game</b>: T asks Ss to write 1
number on a piece of paper.The rest of the
class guess.
Eg. “Three?” – Yes/No
<b>3.Further practice</b>:(8ms)
7’
16’
6’
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work individially
-Go to the boarb and write down
-Work in group to find the words
with the number
Work individially
-Go to the boarb and write down
-Work in individially then play a
game in 2 teams.
- Copy answer keys.
*Play a game: Guessing game.
1 person go to the board & the others
guess the numbers.
<b>-</b> Work in pair to ask and
answer the telephone number
S1: What is your number?
S2: (oh-five- one-one, eight-two)
-Ss write down on their notebook.
<b>20</b>
<b>6</b> <b>9</b> <b>7</b>
<b>12</b>
<b>5</b> <b>15</b>
*Dictation and picture cue drill: - T reads
the following telephone numbers, asks Ss
write down.
04842689 054752590
091569742 0511854347
085571321 071837598
033632437 012541659.
-T checks Ss’ writing by asking as follows:
T: “What’s your number?
S: Oh-two-four…
-T helps Ss practise: T-WC, half – half,
pairs…
<b>4.Survey:-T shows a poster.</b>
<b>Name</b> <b>Telephone numbers</b>
Mai 02403859077
Lan 02403828115
-Asks Ss go around, asks information & fill
in the tables.
* Models: S1: What’s your name?
S2:My name’s ____
S1: What’s your telephone number?
S2: 02403 859077.
-T gets feedback.
5’
-Work individually
<b>-</b> Practice read the telephone
numbers.
-Ss go around the room and ask
information.
<b>-</b> Fill in the grid
<b>-</b> Work individually.
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
- Retell the main points of this lesson.( Numbers from 0 to 20,How to ask and answer
the telephone numbers)
<b>IV.Homework:(2ms)</b>
<b> -Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20.</b>
-Doing exercises C1-7 page 8-12 in work book.
-Preparing new lesson: Unit 2: A1-4.
<b> V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
Pre date:...
<b>Period 7</b>
<b>Unit 2: at school</b>
<b>Lesson 1: A. COME IN</b>
<b>A/The aims and Objectives:</b>
<b> I.The aims: - To help Ss use classroom imperative : “come in/ open your book/</b>
…”
- Develop 4 skills.
<b> II.The objectives: - By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to use classroom </b>
imperatives correctly and fluently, understand T’s requests well.(T’s commands).
<b>*Knowledge:</b>
<b>Classroom imperative to understand the teacher|<sub>s command s:</sub></b>
<b>Come in / Sit down / Stand up / Open your book /Close your book.</b>
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> - T’s: Lesson plan,poster, extra board(warm up)</b>
<b> - Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.</b>
<b>C/ Procedure: </b>
<b>I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and check attendance.</b>
<b>II.Checking up(5’) – T hangs a poster:</b>
a)9 – 5 = b) 16+2= c)4-4= d) 20-7=
e) 8: 4= f) 5+3= …..
(eight divide by four makes two)
- T asks 2 Ss to give the results on board : S1: a,b,c / S2: d,e,f.
- T corrects and give answer keys. Then gives them marks.
<b> III. New lesson:</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>• Revision: (5ms)</b>
*Noughts and crosess:
9-5 20-7 10+2
17+1 6+5 6+8
3-3 6×3 5+3
<b>1.Presentation (8ms)</b>
+ Pre teach:
(To) come in: mời vào
(To) sit down:Ngồi xuống
(To) Stand up : Đứng lên
(To) open your book :Mở sách ra
(To) close your book: Gập sách lại
* Checking: R & R
<b> 2 .Presentation text</b>: <b>A1 P.20</b>.
- T sets the scene: At the classroom, teacher
says sth to her Ss.
5’
7’
8’
<b>-</b> Play a game in two teams
<b>-</b> Then copy down answer
keys
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
-Copy down.
T elicits 6 pictures & helps Ss practise these
sentences.
- Concept check:
+ Asks Ss to translate these sentences in to
Vietnamese.
+ Use: imperatives.
<b>3.A2(p.21</b>) - Match and write:
<b>*Practice</b>:- T helps Ss read 5 phrases in the
box & runs through 5 pictures.
- T asks Ss to match the imperatives with the
pictures.
- T gets feed back.
+Mime drill: - T asks Ss to look at T’s actions
and says:Teacher mines:
* come in / sit down / Stand up /
open your book / close your book
+Simon sayS: A3 p.22:
-T helps Ss play “ Simon says” to practise the
imperatives
<b>4.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
*Mapped dialogue: - T elicits the dialogue &
helps Ss practise dialogue: in pairs, T- WC,
half-half…
(T sets the scene: Miss Huong & Ss are
greeting one another).
S1: Good morning!
S2: Good morning, Miss Hoa!
S1: How are you?
S2: We are fine. How are you?
S1: And open your books
S2: Yes Miss
9’
8’
Work individially
-Go to the boarb and write down
<b>-</b> Listen and practice
<b>-</b> Ss translate in to
Vietnamese
<b>-</b> Read 5 phrases in the box.
<b>-</b> Work individually
-Match the imperatives with the
pictures.Work in pairs.
*Student say:
come in/ sit down / Stand up
open your book / close your
book
<b>-</b> Look at T’s actions then say
in chorus.
Ss practice the dialogue in pairs,
T - WC; half – half…
Miss Hoa Children
…..morning…
…morning.
How are …?
… fine.How
…?
Fine, thanks…
<b>…</b>
<b>III.Consolidation:(1m)- Retell the main points of this lesson.</b>
Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).Prepare for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<b>____________________________________</b>
Pre date:
Teaching date:
<b>Period 8,9</b>
<b>Unit 2: at school</b>
<b>Lesson 2: B WHERE DO YOU LIVE?</b>
<b> A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
<i><b>I.</b></i> <b>The aims</b>
<b> - To help Ss learn the alphabet and ask ,answer about name, spell the name: </b>
“What’s your name? – My name’s… / How do you spell it / your name?”
- Develop 4 skills.
<b>II.Objectives:</b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to ask and answer the questions to talk
about name and learn the alphabet to spell names correctly and fluently.
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> - T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues.</b>
<b> - Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.</b>
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b>I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and check attendance.</b>
<b>II.Checking up(5’)</b>
- T calls 2 Ss come to the board and write the classroom imperatives.
-T corrects and gives marks .
<b>* keys: - Come in, sit down, stand up …</b>
<b> III. New lesson : </b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>Revision:(2ms)</b>
Simon says the teacher’s command:
- come in/ sit down/ Stand up/
- open your book/ close your book
<b>1.Presentation:</b>
+ Pre teach(Vocabulary):
- T elicits vocabulary :
The ABC: <b>- A B C D E F G</b>
2’
7’
Whole class do after teacher
saying
<b> - H I J K L M N O P </b>
<b> - Q R S T U V W X Y Z.</b>
-(to) spell: đánh vần
- How do you spell it? Bạn có thể đánh vần nó
khơng?
+T helps Ss read the alphabet again.
<b>2.B4(p25)</b>:
- T presentation dialogue.
T sets the scene: <i>The T meets one of her Ss and ask </i>
<i>her some questions.</i>
-T helps Ss read dialogue : T-WC ; pairs.
- Let Ss practise the dialogue in pairs
- T helps Ss select out model sentences:
T<i>: What’s your name?</i>
<i><b> Lan</b>: My name’s Lan.</i>
<i> <b>T</b> : How do you spell it/ your name?</i>
<i><b> Lan</b>: L-A-N,Lan.</i>
-Concept check: meaning,use,form.
<b>* Use</b>: asks and answer about name.
<b>* Form</b>:-What’s your name?
<b>* Practice</b>:Word cues drill.
-T runs through word cues.
Khoa Mai Lam Son Loan
-T models:
<i><b> S1: What’s your name?</b></i>
<i><b> S2: My name’s Khoa.</b></i>
<i><b> S1: How do you spell it?</b></i>
<i><b> S2: K-H-O-A,Khoa.</b></i>
-T helps Ss practise speaking : T-WC; half-half;
pairs.
-Asks Ss practise in pairs,ask and answer the real
name. Then T gets feedback.
14’
8’
4’
Copy down
<b>-</b> Listen and read the
dialogue in pairs.
Listen and repeat in chorus.
-Listen and copy down.
Work individially
<b>-</b> Copy down on their
notebooks.
<b>-</b> Work individually.
Copy down.
<b>-</b> Practise in pairs the
dialogue.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>Presentation:</b> Pre-teach:(5ms)
<b>1/Vocabulary</b>: - T elicits vocabulay.
(to) Live: Sống (trans)
(in) a house: Ngôi nhà - Picture
(on) a street:Con đường- Draw
(in ) a city:Thành phố – (trans)
(at) 12 THD street (trans)
<b>*Checking:</b>Matching: SS match the words in
English and the words in VietNamese
<b>• Presentation dialogue:</b>
<b>2. B1(p23</b>): - T sets the scene: Lan meets a
school boy on a street(Nam).They are talking to
each other.
- Asks Ss listen to the dialogue and repeat. Let
Ss practise speaking in pairs.
- T selects out model sentences and write on
board.
<b>Model sentences:</b>
A: Where do you live?
B: I live on Tran Phu street
In: a house/ a city/ Hue/ Viet nam.
Concept check:meaning,form,use .
<b>* Use</b>: Hỏi và trả lời nơi bạn em or ai đó sinh
sống.
<b>3.Practice:(8ms) </b> T runs through these cues:
+Word cue drill:
A city / HCM city / a house
Ha noi / Le loi street
Hung vuong street
<b>+Noughts and crossess:</b>
<b>A house</b> <b>Lach Tray</b> <b>Trang Tien</b>
<b>A street</b> <b>Da Nang</b> <b>A city</b>
<b>Dong Hoi</b> <b>Hang Bong</b> <b>Hung Vuong</b>
-T models: + Where do you live?
I live <i>in a house </i>
T helps Ss practise asking & answering : Ss-Ss;
10’
9’
4’
Coppy down and repeat in
chorus.
-Go to the boarb and match
<b>-</b> Work in pairs
Example exchange:
S1: Where do you live?
S2: On (Le Loi street)
Work in group to make questions
and answer following Example
S1: Where do you live?
S2: On (Le Loi street)
-Ss enjoy the game. ( in 2 group)
<b>-</b> Play agame in 2 teams
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
T-Ss; pairs.
<b>Production:</b>
+ <b>B2(p24</b>):
T helps Ss read the sentences p.24 and asks
them to learn by heart at home.
+ <b>B4(p25):</b>
- T runs through the questions from a) to d).
- Asks Ss to write the answer on their
notebooks.
- T gets feedback.
a) My name’s .. c) I live in/on…
b) I’m 12. d) L-a-n,Lan
7’
Work in group to guess the leters
of the words
Coppy down
-Work in groups of 4 or 3
<b>III.Consolidation:(1m) – Retell the main points of this lesson.</b>
- T sums up: Where do you live? – I live in/ on…
<b>IV.Homework:(2ms)</b>
<b> -Ask them to learn by heart the form and vocabulary</b>
-Do the exercises 3 on page 12; 6 p.13 (Homework book).
- Prepare for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
Pre date:……
Teaching date:………
<b>Period 10 + 11</b>
<b>Unit 2: At school</b>
<b>C. MY SCHOOL</b>
<b> A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
<b>I.The aims: </b>
<b>-To helps Ss use “This/That is …” in possitive statements and Y/N questions: </b>
“ Is this/Is that your + N ? – Yes, it is./ No,it isn’t.” to talk about people and things at
school.
<b>-</b> To help Ss practise 4 skills.
<b>II.Objectives:</b>
<b> - T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD.</b>
<b> - Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.</b>
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b>I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b>II.Checking up(5’) -T hangs a poster ( 3 questions) then asks 2 Ss to go to the </b>
board and answer the questions: a) What’s your name?
b) How do you spell it?
c) Where do you live?
-T corrects and give marks .
<b>* Keys: a)My name’s …./ b) M-a-I, Mai / c) I live in/on….</b>
<b> III. New lesson : (35</b>’)
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation:(10ms)</b>
<i><b>+Pre teach(Vocabulary)</b></i>
- T elicits vocabulary on the board.
(a) student: học sinh(example)
(a) teacher: giáo viên(example)
(a) school: trường học(example)
(a) class: lớp học(example)
(a) Classroom: phòng học (explain)
(a) desk: bàn học sinh(Realia)
<b>* Check: R & R</b>
<b>2/ C1(p.26):</b>*<b>Presentaion dialogue</b>: <i>-T sets the </i>
<i>scene: Ba introduces about his school and his </i>
<i>class; He is talking to Nam. Asks Ss to listen to </i>
<i>the radio and repeat in chorus.</i>
<i>- T helps Ss select out the model sentences:</i>
*a) This is my school/ father.
That is my desk/ mother.
*b)Is this/that your teacher/desk?
<b>-</b> Yes,it is /No, it isn’t.
+ Concept check: meaning,form,use.
<i><b>a) Giới thiệu người or vật ở gần hay ở xa:</b></i>
<i><b>This / That + is+ my + N(số ít)</b></i>
<i><b>b) Hỏi đốn và trả lời về người or vật ở gần/ xa:</b></i>
<i><b>+ Is this/ that + your + N( vật số ít)?</b></i>
10’
12’
Listen and repeat in chorus
and individially
Copy down
Work in individially to
match the word in English
with the words in
Vietnamese
-Listen to and repeat the
radio in chorus.
- work individually.
<i>- Ss select out the model </i>
Work in pairs to ask and
answer the questions and
the word cues
<i><b>Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t.( isn’t = is not).</b></i>
<i><b>+ Is this/that + your + N ( người số ít)?</b></i>
<i><b>Yes,he/she is / No, he/she isn’t.</b></i>
<b>3/Practice</b>:<b> </b>Word cue drill:
- T runs through the word cues.
<i>a) This/school (√ ) b) That/class(x)</i>
<i>c)This/classroom (√) d) That/book(x) </i>
<i>e)This/teacher/he(√) f)That/student/she(x) </i>
+ <i>T models</i>:
<i>- <b>This is my school.</b></i>
<i><b> Is this your school ? Yes,it is.</b></i>
<i><b>-That is my student.</b></i>
<i><b>Is that your student? No,she isn’t.</b></i>
T helps Ss practise: T-Ss; half-half;pairs.
T gets feedback.
<b>*Further Practice:(20ms):</b>Realia drill:
Tasks Ss to point at real things in and around the
classroom , then practise as word cues.
( ruler,eraser, pen,book,..) – T goes around &
helps Ss.Then T checks some pairs.
Eg:<i>T:Is this your desk? S: Yes, it is</i>
8’
5’
Work in chorus, Work in
pairs
Copy down then practise in
pairs
<b>-</b> Practise
Ss to point at real things in
and around the classroom ,
then practise as word cues.
(ruler,eraser, pen,book,..)
Work in pair
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation:(15ms) </b>
– T elicits vocabulary on board.
<b>+Pre teach:</b>Use pictures and realias to
present vocabulary:
(a) door: cöa chÝnh/ (a) window: cưa sỉ
(a) board: b¶ng/ (a) clock: đång hå
(a) waster basket: Thùng rác
(a) school bag: cặp sách
(a)pencil: bút chì/ (a) pen: bút mực
(a) ruler: thước kẻ / (an) eraser: cái tẩy.
+<b>Checking:</b> R & R.
+Dialogue build:- T elicits dialogue.
<i>T: What is this/that?</i>
<i>S:It is a door/an eraser.</i>
<b>15’</b>
<b>10’</b>
<b>-</b> Listen and repeat in chorus.
<b>-</b> Work individually.
<b>-</b> Copy down on the
notebooks.
<b>-</b> Retell some words
Work in group
Teacher Class
What…? It is….
How do….?
D-o-o-r….
<i>S:D-O-O-R?</i>
T helps Ss practise dialogue: T-Ss; half-half;
pairs. Then T asks Ss to complete the
missing words: this, it, is, spell.
- Concept check:
+ Meaning: T asks Ss translate dialogue in to
Vietnamese.
+ Form: <b>What’s this/that?</b>
<b> It’s+a/an+N(số ít)</b>
+Use: Hỏi và trả lời về tên đồ vật ở gần or xa.
<b>2.Practice:(17ms</b>): - T asks Ss to practise
asking and answering with real things in or
<i>Eg: What’s this? – It’s a ruler.</i>
<b> *Wordsquare:</b>
-Presents the wordsquare & asks Ss to work
in pairs to find out the words by circling the
word.
-Devides the class into two groups to practice.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
<i><b> Lucky number:</b></i>
- Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to
play the game in groups.
-Corrects & comments
<i><b>* Questions:</b></i>
1. How do you spell DESK ?
2. How do you spell CLASSROOM ?
3. LUCKY NUMBER
4. How do you spell CLOCK ?
8. How do you spell ERASER ?
9. LUCKY NUMBER
10. How do you spell WINDOW ?
17’
half-half; pairs.
Ss to complete the missing words:
this, it, is, spell.
<b>-</b> Ss practice in pairs
<b>-</b> Play a game in 2
teams.
SS must find out the words
in the wordsquare
- Playing the game in groups
by answering the questions.
-Correcting the mistakes.
<b>-</b> Playa game in two teams
Keys:
1.a/ 2.b/ 3. / 4.c/ 5.d/ 6.e/ 7. /<sub>⋆</sub> <sub>⋆</sub>
8.f/ 9. / 10.g.<sub>⋆</sub>
<b>III/Consolidation.(3ms)Asks Ss to give the questions used to talk about things in the </b>
classroom:‘What’s This/That ?- It’s a/an…’ Then T asks Ss to summarise the general idea
of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homeworks: (2ms)-Study the ‘What’s This/That ?’ ‘ It’s a/an…’ to talk about things </b>
in
the classroom.
- Learn by heart vocabulary and structures .
- Do exercises in page 15-16 in workbook, ex 4 in page 10-11(VBT).
- Prepare pictures of things in the house.
<b>V.Evalation:</b>
………
………
Pre date:
Teaching date:
<b>Period 12+ 13</b>
<b>Unit 3: at home</b>
<b>Lesson 1: A1-2. My house.</b>
<b>I.The aims:</b>
<b>-Teach Ss “Wh- questions” with “these/ those” “What are these/those?” And answer : </b>
“They are + N (s/es)”. And know about living room vocabulary, to talk about things in
the house.
<b>-</b> To help Ss develop 4 skills.
<b>II.Objectives:</b>
<b>-</b> By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to practice: “What’s this/that? - It’s a/an +
N(số ít)”/ “What are these/those?” And answer : “They are + N (s/es)” And
livingroom vocabulary to talk about things in the house.Ss practise 4 skills correctly
and fluently.
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> - T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school </b>
bag,pencil…), picture A1.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things.
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up(5’) -T asks 2 Ss to go to the board to do the homework:</b>
a)this/a ruler b) That/an eraser
-T corrects and give marks .
<b> * Keys: a) What’s this? – It’s a ruler </b>
b) What’s is that? – It’s an eraser.
<i><b> III. New lesson</b>: (35’) – In last lesson, We know how to ask and answer about the name</i>
<i>of a thing. Today, we learn how to ask and answer aboutb names of things ( plural N)</i>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation:(8ms)</b>
+Pre teach:(Vocabulary) Use pictures and
realias to present vocabulary:
<b>9’</b>
(<i>a) lamp: đèn điện ( explain )</i>
<i>(a)bookshelf: Giá sách( explain )</i>
<i>(a) chair: ghế tựa<b> /(</b>a)couch: ghế dài </i>
<i>(visual)</i>
<i>(an) armchair: ghế bành(có tay vị 2 bên)</i>
<i>(a)table: bàn (có thể dùng làm bàn ăn)</i>
<i>(a) T. V: Ti vi (explain)= Television</i>
<i>(a) stool: ghế đẩu ( trans)</i>
<i>(a) stereo: radio,đài (realia)</i>
*Check: matching.
- Repeat in chorus.
- work individually
- Writes the words on the Bb &
checks the meaning & the
prounciation by matching the words
& the pictrures.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
<b>2/ A2(p31</b>): * Presentaion text: This is Nam
house. Here’s the livingroom. Hung is asking
Nam about things in the livingroom.
-T runs through pictures.Then elicits model
sentences: T- Wc ; pairs, individually.
+Model sentences:
<i><b>What is this?/that?</b></i>
<i><b> It is a table</b></i>
<i><b> What are these?/those?</b></i>
<i><b> They are tables</b></i>
<i>- concept check:meaning,form, use </i>
<i>+ Form: What are these/those?</i>
<i><b> They are + N(e/es)</b></i>
<i>Use : The ways to asks and answer about the </i>
<i>name of things ( near or far)</i>
<i>* Note: This/that( singular)</i>
<i> => These/those ( plural) </i>
<b>3.Practice:(10ms)</b>
+Picture drill: A1,2. P31:- T runs through
picture and asks Ss listento the radio.
Eg: S1:What is this? - S2: It is a….
S1:What are those? - S2:They are …….
- Introduces the example exchange & Hepls
Ss to practise asking and answering about
things in A1.
<b>*A2: T helps Ss practise using structure: </b>
9’
10’
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copy down on the notebook.
Listen and repeat in chorus and
work individially
-Practicing in two groups.
Correcting the mistakes.
Work in group (2 group)
- Reading the text.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.
- Making sentences for the next
cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
Work in pairs.
<b>-</b> Copy down on the notebook.
<b>Note:</b>
-What are these? – Theyare tables
- What are those? – They are …
- Asks Ss practise: T-WC; half-half; open
pairs, close pairs.( 1 St points at things in
picture A2)
- T gets feedback, corrects the mistakes.
<b>4*Further practice: - T explains to Ss the</b>
rules of adding “s/es” after singular noun to
make them plural nouns
7’
<i><b>o/x/ss/ch/sh/.. + “es”. Nếu kết </b></i>
<i><b>thúc là “f” thì chuyển F→ V+ es.</b></i>
-Ss use realia things in classroom
to ask and answer about the name
of things.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I. Presentation :(8ms)</b>
<b>1.Preteach: -T elicits vocabulary on the board . </b>
- Family: gia đình (situation)
- Father : bè,bạn (visual )
- Mother: mẹ (visual )
- Sister : chị, em gái (…)
- Brother: anh trai,em trai(…)
- My
- His family/father/
- Her mother/brother/sister
*Check: mathing.
<b>2/A3(p32)(10ms): - Presentaion text:</b>
T sets the scene: This is Ba.He is talking about
his family members.
-Asks Ss listen to the radio once,then twice.Then
asks them listen to and repeat the text in chorus.
a) T hangs a poster and show a grid:
<b> </b>Ba's family
<b>Tên</b> <b>Quan hệ</b> <b>Tuổi</b> <b>Nghề</b>
<b>nghiệp</b>
<b>Ba</b> - 12 Student
Nga Mother - Teacher
Ha Sister 15 student
Lan farther - Docter
Asks Ss read the dialogue silently for details &
fill in the grid individually.(5’)
- T gets feedback.
b)Elicits the dialogue on the board: Dialogue
build
S1: who's this/that? - S2: It's his mother
S1: What's her name? - S2: Her name's Nga
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Listening to the dialogue.
- Practicing the dialogue in
chorus.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Correcting pronunciation & the
mistakes.
* Look at the grid:
Ss read the dialogue and then fill
in the grid .
<b>-</b> Work individually.
<b>Mai Ba</b>
Who’s this/that?
It’s__
mother
What’s _ name?
-Asks Ss fill in the dialogue: his/her/mother/is.
<b>* Cocept check: Meaning,use,form.</b>
<i><b>+ Form: Who + is + this/that?</b></i>
<i><b> It’s his/her + N(số ít)</b></i>
<i><b> What + is </b><b>+ his/her name?</b></i>
<i><b> His/Her name + is + tên.</b></i>
<b>*II/practice(12’) -Word cues drill.</b>
- T runs through the cues.
-Work individually then share
with their partners.
Example Exchange:
S1: Who's that?
S2: That's his mother/father/sister
S1: What's his/her name?
S2: His/her name's Nga/Ha/Lan
Ss draw their family.
S1: Who's this?
S2: It's my...
S1: What's his/her name?
S2: His/her name's ...
<i>Nga</i> <i>Ha</i> <i>Ba</i>
<i>Mother(35)</i> <i>Father(40)</i> <i>Brother(14)</i>
<i>*T models :- Who is that ?</i>
<i> It’s her mother</i>
<i>-Helps Ss practise the dialogue : T-Wc ; </i>
<i>half-half ; open pairs…</i>
<b>III/ Production:(8ms) </b>
- Picture drill( Ss’ photographs)
Asks Ss use their photos to practise speaking in
pairs/groups of 4.
( as the dialogue in « practice »).
<b>-</b> T gets feedback : check some pairs.
<b>IV.Consolidation(3ms)</b>
- Asks Ss retell the main points of this lesson.
- Asks Ss to explain the way to use who's this/ that?.
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework: (1m) – Ss learn by heart vocabulary and structures “ Who’s …?”
- Study the possessive pronouns.
- Prepare for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation:</b>
………
………
………
Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 14 + 15</b>
<b>Unit 3: at home</b>
<b>Lesson 2: . </b>Numbers
- To Help Ss know the way to count things using numbers from 21 to 100and Ss know
how to pronounce plural nouns.
<b>-</b> Develop Ss’ 4 skills.
<b>II.Objectives:</b>
<b>-</b> By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to count things using numbers from 21 to
100 and pronounce plural nouns.
<b>-</b> Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently.
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> - T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, real things(aclock,school </b>
bag,pencil…), picture A1, 3 cards: /s/; /z/;/iz/.
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks, school things.
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up(5’) </b>
-T asks1 St to go to the board to write vocabulary and read them aloud.
- Other to ask and answer the qs using card: Ba/brother, 12
-T corrects and give marks .
<b> * Keys: a) Who’s this? – It’s her brother.</b>
What’s his name? - His name’s Ba.
How old is he? – He’s 12 years old.
<b> III. New lesson : (35’) </b>
* In last lesson, We practised the qs: Who’s this/that? – it’s…..” Today , We are going to
learn numbers from 21 to 100 and the ways to pronounce plural nouns.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation(10’)</b>
Revision some of the numbers from 0 to 20: 0,
1, …..9/10/7/25/5/29/1/15….20 (2’)
<b>* Preteach: (vocabulary</b>)
-Use the card to present voabulary:
<i>+ Thirty:30 / Forty: 40 /Fifty: 50/ Sixty:60</i>
<i>Seventy:70/ Eight:80/ Ninety: 90.</i>
<i>One hundred:100</i>
<i>+ twenty-one/ twenty-two…</i>
<i>+ Thirty-one/ thirty-two…</i>
<i>* check: what and where.</i>
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
A= 1 B D F H I K N O P Q R S T
U V W S Y Z= 26
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
- Listening to the words.
- Repeat the words in chorus.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Snakes and ladder: B1 P.35
-Gives instructions. Help Ss play a game in
groups of 4.
+Realia drill: B2 P.36.
<b>-</b> Asks Ss to practise speaking(use real
things around the classroom)
<b>Eg: -S1: There is one door.</b>
Ss count things in the pictures and fill in to
boxes below the picture.Then check Ss’
answer.
+Dictation lists:
T reads: Desk, rulers, benches, students, tables,
books, clocks, couches, door, windows,
houses, lamps
<b>-</b> Helps Ss pronounce the plural nouns
<b>-</b> Gives the rules of ending
sounds:/s/;/z/;/iz/.
+ /s/ :nouns ending in: Ks,ps,ts
+ /iz/:nouns ending in:
ches,shes,ses,ges,xes,zes.
+ /z/: the rest nouns.
-Read the list of words: desks,rulers….
- T asks Ss put the words in 3groups according
to the pronunciation:
-T gets feedback.
Work in groups of 4
Work in pairs
<b>-</b> Play agame in table
S1: There one door
S2: And there are 22 desks
-Work in pairs
-Work in individially
Students write:
/s/ /z/ /iz/
desks Rulers Benches
Students Tables Couches
Books Doors Houses
Clocks Windows
lamps
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>*.Revision (5ms)</b>+Chain game: B2 P.36
Students use the information they have filled in
B2P.36 to describe their classroom to check the
form “There is. There are..”
Example:- S1: There is one door
S2: There are one door and six windows
S3:...
<b>1.Presentation:(10ms)</b>
+Preteach(vocabulary): T elicits vocabulary and
write on the bb.
Work in individially
<b>-</b> Listen and repeat in chorus.
<b>-</b> Copy down .
-(a) bookcase = (a) bookshelf (synanym).
- How many…?Bao nhiêu..? (trans)
People(n) người.
*check: R & R
<i><b>2/Presentation text: B3 P.37</b></i>
- Ask and answer about quantities.
-Dialogue build,point at real things to elicit the
dialogue . Help Ss read dialogue
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
-Present the text by T reads the model and gives the
structures and gives the new structure
+<i>Model sentences:</i>
Nam:How many doors are there ?
benches
Lan: There is one in my family
are eight
- Concept check meaning,form..
*Form:
How many+N(s/es)+ are there?
There are/ is+ Number+ n
- Gives the usage(by Vietnamese)
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Picture drill:(B2 P.36 & B5 P.37) –T runs through
pictures.Help Ss practise speaking:T-WC/half-half
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to
repeat in chorus & in individual.
<b>4.Production:(7ms)- T elicits the table</b>
+S urvey: Copy the survey on the board and make
up the questions:
S1: How many people are there in your family?
S2: There are ..
-Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
- Reading the dialogue in
individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
-Ss fill in the blanks: many/are
/there/is.
Copy down
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.
- Making sentences for the next
cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
S1: How many desk are there ?
S2: There are six?
Ss to make sentences for the next.
Nam
e
In your
family?
In your house? In your classroom?
people Chair
s
Ba 3
<b>IV.Consolidation:(1m)</b>
- Asks Ss to give the questions & the numbers to talk about things in the classroom, the
living-room & the family. How to ask and answer about quantities.
S1: How many doors/desks are there ?
S2: There is one/ There are [two]
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Learn by heart ‘How many…are there ?’ questions & the exchange.
- Exercise: 3 & 4. P 22. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 38.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 16</b>
c. Families
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
<b>I.The aims:</b>
- To Help Ss read a text for details and talk about jobs.
<b>-</b> Develop Ss’ 4 skills.
<b>II.Objectives:</b>
<b>-</b> By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about Lan’s
family, Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about jobs.
<b>-</b> Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially reading skill.
<b>B/ Preparation: ( dạy máy- CNTT)</b>
<b> - T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.</b>
- Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up(5’) </b>
a)Questions: -T shows the picture of C1(38) and asks Ss to answer the Qs.
1.How many tables are there?/.2.How many armchairs are there?
3.How ……? / 4.How many people …?
2.There is one. 4. There are four.
- T corrects and give marks.
<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson : (35’) </b>
<i><b> I</b>n last lesson, We learned the way to make questions and answer with “ How many + </i>
<i>N(s/es)+are there?- There is/are..”. Today, we are going read the text about Lan’s family.</i>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>*Revision(3ms)</b>
+Write it up: From survey lesson 4
Ask students to talk : “There are/ is...”
<b>1.Pre- reading:(12ms)</b>
+Pre teach(Vocabulary):
(an) engineer(picture): kĩ sư
(a) doctor (picture):bác sĩ
(a) nurse (picture):Y tá
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
-Introduces the requirement (luat)& ask Ss to
work in individual to find out the jobs.
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.
<b>2/C1(p38):</b>
a)Open prediction:Asks Ss look at the picture
C1 & guess information to fill in the table:
<b>Lan|<sub>s family</sub></b>
How old..? What does he/she do?
Father 40 an engineer
Mother 35 a teacher
Brother 8 a student
Lan
- T gets feedback.
<b>3.While reading(20ms) </b>
– Asks Ss listen to the disc
Asks students to read C1 P.38 to check their
- Listening to the words.
- Repeat in chorus then in individual.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to find out the
jobs & comparing in pairs.
- Giving the information & correcting.
Working in pairs to guess about Lan’s
family:
How old...?
What does he/ she do?
Reading C1 P.38 to check their
predictions
Working in groups to ask and anwer
the question in C1 P.38
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeat in chorus then in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
predictions.
+Noughts and crosses:
T asks questions from a) to h) in C1 P.38
<b>b) Comprehension questions:</b>
-Asks Ss read the text again & answer the Qs
in pairs.
-Gets feedback
Eg: a)How many books are there in Lan|<sub>s </sub>
living room?
- There are four people in her family
<b>c) Hỏi và trả lời về nghề nghiệp:</b>
<i>*T models: + What does he/she do?</i>
<i> - He/she is a teacher/an engineer.</i>
<i>+ What do you/they do?</i>
<i> - I’m a student / They are students</i>
<b>*.Post reading:(7ms) </b>
– Talk about song’s family.
+Word cue drill: C2 P.39.
(T runs through the family as C1).
- Asks Ss look at the family tree(p39).
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Transformation writing
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>* Keys: </b>
b) He is forty.
c) He is an engineer
d) She is thirty five
e) She is a teacher
f) He is eight
g) He’s a student
h) They are in the livingroom.
*Eg: This is song’s family.There are
four people in his family: his father;his
mother;his sister and him.
This is his father. He’s a doctor.He’s
forty two years old.This is his mother.
She’s a nurse.She’s thirty nine.His
sister is fifteen.She’s a student.
-Ss to make sentences for the next
Ss transform the sentences in C1.P.38
<b>IV.Consolidation:(1m) </b>
– How to introduce about someone’s family.
How to ask and answer about jobs.
Check the form : “How many...? - There is/are....”
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Learn by heart cabulary & structures of this lesson.
- Do the exercse 3 P.22 in workbook.
- Prepare for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
<b>*************************************************************************</b>
<b>*******</b>
Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 17</b>
<b>I.The aims:- To Help Ss further practise the uses of “To be” ,imperative,numbers, </b>
<b>-</b> Develop Ss’ 4 skills.
<b>II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use “to be”, imperative, </b>
numbers from 0 to 100, Qs words( What / Where/ How/ How many…),“There is/There
are…” and furniture vocabulary.
<b>-</b> Read and understand the text about Lan’s family, Ss will be able to ask and answer
questions about jobs.
<b>-</b> Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially reading skill.
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up(5’) - T calls 2 Ss to read the introduction of song’s famly.(may be sing </b>
that song).- Then T corrects and gives marks.
<b> III. New lesson : (35’) </b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Grammar: </b>*<b>TO BE:(7ms)</b>
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 1-3 P.40
<b>-</b> Retell the forms of theVerbs : "To be”
*<i>Subjects: I/we/you/they/he/she/it</i>
<i>*To be: am/ is/ are.</i>
<b>2/Exercises:</b> * word cues drill:
<b>*Ex1-3(40) </b>– T helps Ss do exercise
- T gets feedback.
- T explain and model: <i>They are teachers.</i>
They/teachers ; We/student ; She/ a nurse
<i><b> He/ an engineer ; I/ a student ; They/ sister</b></i>
<i><b>You/12 ; We/brother ; She/ a doctor</b></i>
Answer keys:
1./ am – am – are – is – are.
2./ am – is – is – are – are.
3./ a) are – am; b) is – is.
c) is – isn’t ; d) are – aren’t.
- Work individually.
-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play in two
groups by choosing the cue & making
question.
-Corrects & comments the game.
<b>*IMPERATIVE:(10ms</b>)- Asks S look at the
picture(p41) and answer the question in pairs.
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 4 P.40
-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work
in individual to fill in the gaps.
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.
+Simon says
<b>*Question word:(10ms)</b>
+Gap fill: Grammar practice 6 P.41.
– Retell the questions words they’ve learned
* Answer keys: Song|<sub>s a student and he is</sub>
12. There are 4 people in Song|<sub>s family : his</sub>
farther, his mother, his sister and him. His
farther is name is Kien.He is 42 and he is a
doctor. His mother|<sub>s name is Oanh. she is 39</sub>
years old and she is a nurse. His siter|<sub>s name is</sub>
Lan. She is 15 and she is a student.
*Ex7(42)- Asks Ss to write the words for the
numbers & write the numbers for the words.
a.12 b.4 c.Kien d.42 e.a doctor
f.Oanh g.39 h.a nurse i.Lan J.a student
<b>*Numbers:(5ms)</b>
+Bingo: T reads: seventeen, seventy, eleven,
one hundred, thirty, sixteen, forty, fourteen,
three, nineteen...
<b>*Furniture:(10ms) – Elicits the picture quiz</b>
+Crossword Puzzle: - T explains how to play a
game.Grammar practice 10 P.43. Asks Ss fill
in the picture quiz in group of 4.
+Guessing game: example exchange:
<i>S1: Is it a TV?/ S2: No, it is not</i>
<i> S3:Is it a chair?/ S2: Yes, it is</i>
+T/F repetition drill: picture B5 P.37
There is a TV./ There are 3 stools
There are 4 people
<b>- Working in individual to fill in the</b>
gaps.
-Comparing in pairs & giving the
information.
4/Answer keys:
a) come in ; b) sit down.
c) open your book ; e) stand up.
d) close your book.
*Answer keys:
a) What - is ; b) Do - live.
c) Who - is ; d) What - is.
Work in individially
+Anwers key:
1.How old is Song?
2.How many poeple are there in his
family?
3.What is his farther|<sub>s name?</sub>
4.What does he do?
5.What is his mother|<sub>s name?</sub>
6.How old is she?
7.what does do?
8.Whatis his sister|<sub>s name?</sub>
9.What does she do?
T- whole class
SS choose 9 numbers
Work in groups
Work in pairs:
SSdraw their own pictures of furniture
on scrap of paper and ask following the
example exchange
There are 2 armchairs and 2 chairs
There are 7 books./ There are 2 lamps
There is a lamp./
There is a steeo and a telephone
(Repeat)
(Repeat
<b>IV.Consolidation:(2ms)- T sums up the main contents of this lesson</b>
- Check the form : “How many...?/ There is/are....”
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>
<b> - Complete all the exercises 1→ 10(p 40-43). Review from Unit 1 to Unit 3. </b>
Prepare to do a test of next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 18 + 19</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
<b>I.The aims:- To Help Ss have a chance to test their knowledge of English in </b>
units1,2,3.
<b>II.Objectives:</b>
<b>- By the end of the test, ss will be able to know their knowledge about units 1,2,3.</b>
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan,paper tests.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, pens and some school things
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up </b>
<b>III/ The contents of the test</b>
tên: ………
Lớp:6……..
(nộidung,chươg…) <b>Nhận biết</b> <b>Thông hiểu</b>
<b>Vận dụng</b>
<b>Cộng</b>
<b>Cấp độ thấp</b> <b>Cấp độ cao</b>
<b>(LISTENING)</b> <i>Số câu: 4</i>
<i>Số điểm 1</i>
<i>Số câu: 4</i>
<i> Số điểm: 1</i>
<b>READING</b>
My family
Trả lời câu hỏi
<i>Số câu 4</i>
<i>Số điểm:2 </i>
<i>Số câu: 1</i>
<i>Số điểm: 0,5</i>
<i>Số câu:5</i>
<i> Số điểm2,5</i>
<b>LANGUAGE</b>
<b>FOCUS</b>
’To be” ,Wh- question
Chọn đáp án
<i>Số câu: 4</i>
<i>Số điểm 2</i>
<i>Số câu: 4</i>
<i> Số điểm 2</i>
<b>WRITING</b>
Viết về bản thân
xắp sếp từ
Số câu:4
Số điểm 2
Viết đoạn văn
Số câu:5
Số điểm :2,5 Số câu: 9Số điểm: 4,5
Số câu:8
Số điểm: 3
Số câu: 9
Số điểm: 4,5
Số câu:5
Số điểm :2,5
Số câu: 22
Tổng điểm: 10
Class:6……
I./.Chọn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với những từ còn lại:
1/ A. afternoon B.armchair C.father D.chair.
2/ A. street B. people C.desk D.teacher.
3/ A.students B. books C.lamps D. couches
4/ A. clocks B. desks C. tables D. lamps
II./. Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi.
This is my family. We are in our living room. There are five people in my family.
My father, my mother, my sister, my brother and me. This is my father. He is 45 years old, he is a teacher.
This is my mother. She is 40 years old, she is a nurse. My sister is 8. She is a student. My brother is 6, he
<b>Questions:</b>
1/ How many people are there in her family?
->……….
2/ How old is her father?
->……….
3/ What does he do?
->……….
4/ What does her mother do?
->……….
5/ Is her brother an engineer?
->……….
<b>III.Chọn đáp đúng cho mỗi câu sau.</b>
1.How old…….you?
A.is B.are C.am
2. She ……….a student.
3. ……….is your name?
A.What B. Where C. How
4. There ……..two books.
A.is B.are C.am
IV/ Sắp xếp các từ gợi ý thành câu hoàn chỉnh
1. is / name/ your/ what?
………
2. live/ where/ do/ you?
………..
3. name/ Nam/ is/ my.
………..
4. old/ how/ you/ are?
………..
V/ Viết đoạn văn sử dụng các từ gợi ý sau.
- My name/Lan.
- I/ eleven/ years old.
- I/ student.
- I / class 6 A
- I/ live/ Van Yen.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 20</b>
Lesson 1: A. WHERE IS YOUR SCHOOL<b>?</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
<b>I.The aims:- To Help Ss read and understand the paragraphs about phong’s school and</b>
Thu’s school, practise the possessive case( so huu cach), Yes/ No questions. and “or”
qs.
Develop reading skill.
<b>II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read the paragraphs about </b>
Thong’s school and Thu’s school fluently.
Ss know how to describe location and size of school, use possessive case: N’s+ N ; Yes/
No Qs; “or” qs and Where is your school? In the country
<b>-</b> Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially reading skill.
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
<b> II.Checking up: No check.</b>
<b> III.New lesson: (38’)</b>
<i> - Today, We’re going to</i> read the paragraphs about Phong’s school and Thu’s school.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I/Pre teach: (Vocabulary)(7’)</b>
-Big:(realia) to, lớn
-Small:(realia) nhỏ, bé
-In the city(Picture): ở thành phố
-In the country: (Picture)Ở nông thôn
-Or : hoặc , hay.(trans)
Is your school in the country or in the city?
(Trg học của bạn ở miền quê hay ở thành phố?)
+Checking: R & R.
* <b>A1(44).(4’)</b>
<b>*Pre-reading</b>:
+ Matching(T hangs a poster).
-T sets the scene: Use 2 pictures.T runs through
the words/ phrases:
Big Phong|<sub>s</sub>
school
small
In the
country
Thu’s School In the city
-Ask Ss to share their ideas with their partners.
- Get feedback.
<b>II/ While-reading</b>:(20’)
- Ask Ss to read A1,3(p.44-45) Then to check
their predictions.
- Get feedback.
*Comprehention Qs(p.44).T runs through 4
questions. Ask Ss to read A1 again and answer
questions in pairs.
Get feedback.(give answer keys).
<b>*Ex A3(p.45) </b>– Ss read the paragraph again &
answer Qs in pairs(There are 4 qs).
-Get feedback.
a)There are eight.
b)There are 400
c)There are twenty
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Read the text and check their
preditions
Work in groups(Answer the questions
in A2 P.44 from a to d
Work in groups.
*Keys:
a) Yes, It is b) No, it isn’t.
c) It’s in the country./ d) No, itisn’t.
*S1:Is Phong|<sub>s school small?</sub>
S2:Yes, it is
S1:Is Thu|<sub>s school small?</sub>
S2:No, it is not.
Form: <b>Tobe + S + ..?</b>
<b>-Yes, S+ tobe./No, S + tobe+not.</b>
<b>* To be + S + … or ….?</b>
<b>- Chọn 1 trong 2 để trả lời.</b>
<b>*Where is your school?- It is in the </b>
<b>…</b>
d)There are nine hundred.
<b>III/Post reading(8ms)</b>
<b>Ex 4(46)-Elicit model sentences: </b>
<b>Yes/No qs and Or qs. Then answer the qs.</b>
Practice: In pairs using word cues:
+Yes/ no questions answer drill:
Phong|<sub>s school</sub>
Thu|<sub>s school In the country?</sub>
Your school Big/ small?
Your brother|<sub>s school In the city?</sub>
Your sister|<sub>s school</sub>
<b>-</b> T checks some pairs, and corrects.
từ chỉ quyền sở hữu.
eg: Mary’s house, Thu’s book…
N’s+ S
<b>Note:</b>
- Nếu chủ từ là số ít, ta viết: “ 'S”
- Nếu chủ từ là số nhiều ta viết “ S' ”.
Eg: Parents' bag/ Lan’s ruler…
<b>-</b> Ss copy down. Work
individually.
<b> </b>
<b> VI.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
- Retell the main points of this lesson.
- How to describe location and size of school, possessive case, Y/N qs and or qs.
<b>V.Homework:(2ms)</b>
- Ss learn by heart vocabu,read A1-3 again.
- Do exercises A2-3(44-45)
-Write Y/N qs using word cues in post reading.
-Prepare for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 21 + 22</b>
<b>I.The aims:- To Help Ss listen to the dialogue betweenThu and Phong; ordinal </b>
numbers from 1st<sub> to 10</sub>th<sub> ; “Which” - qs. Develop Ss’ 4 skills, especially listening skill.</sub>
<b>II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen and understand the </b>
contents of the dialogue between Thu and Phong. They are talking about their schools
and their classes.Ss understand “which” – qs; ordinal numbers from 1st<sub> to 10</sub>th<sub> .</sub>
<b>-</b> Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially listening skill.
<b>B/ Preparation: T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> II.Checking up(5’) Warm up:</b>
Pelmanism:<b> I Thu He You She // His My Your Her </b>
<b>Thu|<sub>s</sub></b>
Ask 3 Ss to make qs and answer using word cues:
a)Ha’s school/ big ? / yes.
b)Your house/ in the city? / No.
c) Your school/ big or small?/ small.
<b> Keys: a) Is Ha’s school big? – Yes, it is. b) Is your house in the city ? – No, it </b>
isn’t.
c) Is your school is big or small? – it’s small.
- T corrects and give them marks
<b> III.New lesson: (35’)Today, We’re going to listen to the dialogue between Thu and </b>
<b>Phong about their schools and classes.</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1/</b>
<b> Pre teach( vocabulary)(7’) </b>T elicits
vocabulary and ordinal numbers:
-Floor(n) sàn nhà, tầng.(Trans)(The first
floor:tầng 1)
-Grade(n): Khối lớp(trans)
The sixth floor: (Picture):tầng 6
<b>*Check</b>: matching.
<b>2. Pre-Listening: (8’) B1(p.47):</b> T hangs a
poster.
<b>+Predict dialogue</b>:T sets the scene: Thu and
Phong are talking to each other about their school
and classes.
<b>Then model sentences</b>:- give form.
-Show the dialogue with some missing words.
-Ss guess the missing words individually.
<i>*<b>Thu:</b> Hello, which grade are you in?</i>
<i><b>Phong</b>:I am in grade...(1)...</i>
<i><b>Thu</b>: And which class are you in?</i>
<i><b>Phong</b>:...(2)...What about you?</i>
<i><b>Thu:</b> Iam in grade...(3)...,class...(4)...</i>
<i>How many floors does your school have?</i>
<i><b>Phong</b>:..(5)...It is asmall school.</i>
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work in groups of 3.
-Listen to and guess.
-Work individually.
-Ss listen and check their
predictions.
-Ss share their ideas with their
partners
Ss work in pairs
*Model sentences:
<b>Which + n+ tobe+…?</b>
<b>It’s/I’m…</b>
<b>* Where is her/his classroom?</b>
<b>It is on the first floor.</b>
*practice:
<i><b>Thu:</b> My school has ....(6)...floors and my </i>
<i>classroom is on the ...(7)...floor. </i>
<i>Where is your classroom?</i>
<i><b>Phong</b>: It is on the...(8)...floor.</i>
-Ask Ss share with theirs partners.
T gets feedback.
<b>While listening:(13’)</b>Asks ss to listen the text B1
P.47 to correct their predictions.
-Get feedback
<b>Keys: </b>1.6 / 2.6A/ 3.7/ 4.7C/
5.two/ 6.four/ 7.second/ 8.first.
<b>*</b>Grid: B2 P.48: Complete the table. T runs
through the table.Ask Ss listen to the tape again
and fill in the table.
Get feedback.
Name Grade class Classroom’s
floor
Thu 7 7C 2nd
Phong 6 6A 1st
You 6 6E 1st
<b>3.Post listening:(7’)</b>* <b>Ex 3(p.48):-</b>Write it up
Eg: I’m in grade 6.I’m in class 6E. My school
has 2 floors and my classroom is on the first
floor.
-Call 2 or 3 Ss to read their writings loudly.
- T corrects.
*<b>Ex 5(P.48)- </b>Complete the dialogue
Ask Ss look at the dialogue in the text book:
(have 7 gaps).Ask Ss fill in the dialogue.
Get feedback.
S2:She is in grade 6
S1: Which class is Thu in?
S2:She is in class 6A
S1:Where is her classroom?
S2:It is on the first floor.
Give answer keys.
<b>-</b> Listen and check.
<b>-</b> Give ideas.
<b>-</b> Look at the text book .
<b>-</b> Listen and fill the table.
<b>-</b> Work individually.
Ss write 3 sentences about
themselves
Work individaully. Then read
-Work in pairs.
Give answer keys:
1.small/ 2.does/ 3.has/ 4.are/
5am/ 6.is/ 7.on.
<b>IV/Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson. </b>
*T sums up: Ordinal numbers/ Which grade/class are you in? – I’m in grade/class…
Which floor is your classroom? – It’s on the … floor.
<b>V/ Homework:- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar. Do exercises </b>
B1,3,5.
- Prepare for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 23 +24</b>
<b>I.The aims:- To Help Ss use the vocabulary of routines to talk about habitual(thoi </b>
quen)actions, make positive statement with “I”, use simple present tense .
<b>II.Objectives:- By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to use simple present tense </b>
with the first person(singulara) and vocabulary of routines: Iget up.I get dressed….
<b>-</b> Ss practise 4 skills correctly and fluently, especially listening skill.
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan,poster, word cues, cassette,CD, pictures.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks,pictures.
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up(5’)</b>
T calls some Ss to answer the questions:
1. which grade are you in?. / Which class are you in?. / 3.Which floor are you in?
<b>Keys:</b>1. I’m in gade 6; 2. I’m inclass 6C/D/E; 3. It’s on the first floor.
- T corrects and give them marks
<b> III.New lesson : (35’ )</b>
<i><b>Today, We learn how to describe everyday activitives.</b></i>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation:(8ms)</b>
<b>+Pre teach(vocabulary)Use the pictures on p.49</b>
(to)get up: Thức dậy (visual)
(to)Get dressed: mặc quần áo (picture)
(to)brush my/your teeth:đánh răng của
tôi/bạn(mime)
(to)wash my face: rửa mặt của tôi(mime)
(to)have breakfast:ăn sáng(picture)
(to)go to school: đi học(trans)
<b>*Check: Matching</b>
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
<b>2*Presentation text: C1.P.49(10’)</b>
-Dialogue build: set the scene: A friend wants to
know about your routines.
T elicits dialogue and write on the bb
<i><b>+Model sentences:</b></i>
<i><b>A:What do you do every morning?</b></i>
<i><b>B: I get up</b></i>
<i><b> brush my teeth</b></i>
<i><b> have breakfast</b></i>
* Concept check: meaning, form,use.
<b>*Form: </b>
<b>What do + s(we/you/they) + do…?</b>
<b> S(we/you/they)+ V + …</b>
<b>*Use: Ask and answer about your friend </b>
<b>routines</b>
<b>3/Practice:(10ms)</b>
<i>a.Word cue drill</i>:T runs through the cues and
models:
S1:What do you do every morning?
S2:I <i><b>get up</b></i>
S2:What do you do then?
S1:...
<b>...up ... . .. .dressed </b>
<b>...teeth </b>
<b>... ...face .... . .breakfast </b>
<b>...school</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>b.Write it up: C3 P.49</i>
+Write 5 sentences about what YOU do every
morning. Begin with:
Every morning, I get up. Then I...
<b>*Further practice:(7ms)</b>
+Chain game:
S1:I get up
S2: I get up and brush my teeth
S3: I get up, brush my teeth and I get dressed
S4:...
individual.
- Give the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copy the words Correcting the
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
- Read the dialogue in individual.
-Correct the pronunciation.
Work in pairs to practice the form:
Work in pairs to practice the model
sentences:
EX:
S1:What do you do every morning?
S2:I get up
S2:What do you do then?
-Ss work in group of 7.s
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Make sentences for the next cues.
- Practice in groups & in pairs .
-Correct the pronunciation.
-Work in pairs to practice the
exchange
- Play in pairs & correcting the
-T checks some groups and corrects.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: revision (6’)</b>
Explain about the way changes from “ my”
become “ his/ her/ your”.
<b>-</b> (to) brush your teeth / his/her teeth
<b>-</b> (to) wash your/his / her face.
<b>-</b> (to) say “hello” to classmate.
<b>2.Presentation: (8’)</b>
<b>*Presentation text: C1</b>
<b>-</b> T elicits the pictures and text.
Elicit model sentences and write on bb.
<i><b>Model sentences:</b></i>
<i><b>S1: What does Ba/ he/she do every morning?</b></i>
<i><b>S2: Ba gets up. He brushes his teeth.</b></i>
<i><b>She has breakfast.</b></i>
<i><b> She goes to school.</b></i>
<b>-</b> Explain the use and form:
<b>Form: </b>
<b>What does + he/she + do …?</b>
<b> He / She + V-s/es.</b>
<b>*Practice : Word cue drill</b>
(8’)
<b>-…….... up - …….dressed - ………</b>
<b>teeth</b>
<b>- ……..face - …..breakfast - ……</b>
<b>school</b>
<b>- … His classroom - …hello to his </b>
<b>classmates</b>
-Run through those cues.
*Model: ask and answer about Ba
<i> T : What does he do every morning?</i>
<i>Ss: He gets up.</i>
<i>T : What does he do then?</i>
<i>Ss: He gets dressed.</i>
Listen and repeat.
Copy down on the notebook.
<b>-</b> Listen and repeat.
<b>-</b> Look at the pictures and
practise, give model
sentences.
<b>-</b> Copy.
Ss ask and answer about Ba
<b>-</b> Read loudly.
<b>-</b> Listen and repeat.
<b>-</b> Practise speaking.
<b>-</b> Help ss practice speaking: T – WC , half
– half , open pairs , closed pairs.
*Correct Ss’pronunciation os other errors if
necessary.
<b>3.Production: C3-6 : Write it up. (6’)</b>
<b>-</b> Ask ss to write 5 sentences about Ba.
Begin with:
<i><b> Every morning, Ba gets up. He gets </b></i>
<b>-</b> Let Ss write individually.
<b>-</b> Correct Ss’ mistakes.
<i><b>Every morning, Ba gets up. He </b></i>
<i><b>gets dressed …</b></i>
-One St to go to the board to write
about Ba.
<b>-</b> Others to write on their
notebook.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation:(5ms)</b>
+Number dictation:<i>T reads and Ss write : one </i>
<i>ten, fourty thirty, five twenty, three fifteen, six </i>
<i>forty, seven forty five, ten thrirty, twelve twenty </i>
<i>five, eleven fifty, two fifty five.</i>
<b>+Pre teach(Vocabulary): (9’)</b>
-<i>The time: thời gian(example)</i>
<i>-Ten oclock: 10 giờ đúng(trans)</i>
<i>-half past ten: 10 giờ 30’, 10 rưỡi.( visual)</i>
<i>-(to) be late for: trễ, muộn.(situation)</i>
<i>-Past: qua, hơn.(trans)</i>
*Eg .“We are late for school”
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
<b>+Checking: What and where</b>
<b>2*Presentation dialoguge : C4 P.50.(7’)</b>
<b>-Set the scene: Hoa meets Ba at the schoolgate. </b>
Ss listen to the dialogue between Hoa and Ba
then repeat aloud.
<b>+Model sentenses:</b>
<i><b>S1: What time is it?</b></i>
<i><b>S2:It is eight oclock / eight fifty/ half past </b></i>
<i><b>eight.</b></i>
Use: Ask and answer about the time.
<b>3.Practice:(12’)</b>
Work in individially
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
- Repeat the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Give the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copy the words Correcting the
mistakes
Work in groups.
- Copy down the new structures .
- Work individually.
* <i>Cách trả lời giờ đúng </i>
<b> It’s + số giờ + o’clock.</b>
<b>a/ Ask & answer about the timeusing a </b>
clock( with different period of time):
1.10 ; 1.30 ; 11.0 ; 9.45 ; 5.15; 8.25. …
<i>* Model</i><b>: - What is the time? / What time is it?</b>
- Practise asking answering about the time:
T-WC; half- half; open pairs, close pairs.
<b>b/ Word cues drill: Run through the cues:</b>
Get up / 5.45 Go to school / 6.15
Have breakfast / 6.00 Go home / 10.00
*Model:<i>S1:What time do you get up?</i>
<i> S2:At five fourty-five</i>
<b>*Further practice:(8ms)C7(51)(</b>
-Write the answer .
- Ask Ss to read C6(51) again.
Translates C6 in to vietnamese
Ask Ss to write the answer of C7 in notebook.
(about themselves)
Eg: + I get up at …
+ I have breakfast at …
<b>+Noughts and crosses:(If have more time)</b>
<b>6.10</b> <b>6.30</b> <b>4.45</b>
<b>7.00</b> <b>11.00</b> <b>11.30</b>
<b>3.15</b> <b>8.20</b> <b>9.40</b>
* <i>cách trả lời giờ hơn</i>
<i><b> </b></i><b>It’s + số giờ + số phút</b>
ex: 6.20 – It’s six twenty
<i>* Cách trả lời giờ rưỡi</i>
<b> It’s half past + số giờ</b>
<b> ( It’s + số giờ + thirty) </b>
<b> </b>ex: 8.30 – It’s half past eight.
( It’s eight thirty )
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially.
Work in pairs to practice example
exchange.
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Make sentences for the next cues.
- Practice in groups & in pairs .
-Correct the pronunciation.
Work in pairs to practice
Work in groups to ask and answer the
questions about the time
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms) - Asks Ss to give the questions & answer to talk about the time.</b>
<i><b> What time is it ?- It’s ten o’clock / ten fifteen / half past ten.</b></i>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)- Study the model exchange. </b>
- Exercise: write about your family member’s routines.
- Prepare the picture on page 52 & the things you usually do in a day.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period: 25 + 26</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
- To Help Ss revise how to describe everyday routines with subject “I”, “she”, Ss ask and
answer about what a person does everyday.
Develop 4 skills correctly and fluently.
-By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able touse present simple tense to describeeveryday
routines with “I,She” . Ss practise asking answering about what a person does
everyday fluently:<i><b>+ What does she/ he do every day / every morning / every </b></i>
<i><b> She / he + V(s/es)…</b></i>
-Ss practise 4 skills fluently.
<b>B/ Preparation: -Computer and projector</b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (10’) *Warm up</b>: T give cues, Ss make some qs and answer:
5.56’ <b>12.30’ 2.9’ 2.55’ 5.4’</b>
Model:What time is it?
It’s five-fifty six
-T asks some Qs about the time
- Ask 2 SS to answer the Qs :
1.What time do you go to school?
2. What time does Ba go to school?
*keys: 1. I go to school at …
2. He goes to school at ….
- T corrects ,remark and give marks.
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation</b>:(7ms)
<b>+Pre teach:(Vocabulary)-T elicits vocabulary</b>
on the board.
(to) play games: chơi trò chơi (situation)
(to) do your homework: làm bài tập của (bạn)
my
her
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
Copy down
- Repeat in chorus . Work in individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>+Checking: Slap the board together with:</b>
<i>go to school / Have breakfast / Get up</i>
<b>*Presentation text: (8’)A1 P.52(picturer </b>
<b>story)</b>
- T elicits 4 pictures.
Help Ss tell a story using subject: “ I ”
<i>Eg: Every day I get up at 6.00.. …</i>
<i>Every evening I do my homework. ….</i>
<b>-</b> Ask Ss to tell a story using subject
“Nga”
<i>Eg</i>:Everyday Nga gets up at six ….
Help Ss read and listen to A1
<b>2/A2 P.53 a-d: (7’)T run through the questions</b>
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
pairs to answer. Then give the keys.
Questions: In the Ss’book
- Revision:Use present simple tense to talk
about somebody’s routines then ask Ss give
model .
<b>3.Practice(5’)</b>
<b>* EX4:Substituation drill( hang poster)</b>
- Help Ss say out a St’s routines as follows:
Everyday, I get up at six o’clock.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
<i>Teacher</i> :Every day I get up at six
I brush my teeth / I wash my face/ I get dressed
I have breakfast / I go to school / I play games
I do my homework.
<b>3.Production:(5ms)+Survey:</b>
S1: What time do you get up?
S2: 5.30
Name Get up Have breakfast
Vien 5.30 6.15
... ...
morning(6.30)<sub> </sub>
Every afteroon(15.30)
Everyevening(19.30)
- Reading the dialogue in individual.
- Answer the questions, work in pairs
<b>*Model </b>
<i><b>Everyday I go to </b></i>
<i><b>school.</b></i>
<i><b> she goes </b></i>
<b>+ S + V / V(s/es)…</b>
-Working in pairs to answer. Then
giving the keys:
1./ Everyday she gats up .
2./ Everyday morning she goes to
school.
3./ Everyday afternoon she plays
games.
4./ Everyday evening she does her
homeworks.
- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.
<b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
<i>Students :</i>Every day Nga gets up at 6
She brushes her teeth
She washes her face……
*Play game Do your home work
4.30 7.00
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Presentation</b>:(12ms)
+Pre teach(Vocabulary) – Elicit vocabulary
<i> (1)(to) listen to music:(picture): nghe nhạc</i>
<i> (3)(to) watch T.V: :(picture) xem ti vi</i>
<i>(2)(to) do the housework:(picture) làm công việc </i>
<i>nhà</i>
<i>(4) (to) read: :(picture): đọc</i>
<b>+Checking: ordering </b>
<i><b>+Ordering vocabulary:</b></i>
T reads: Every morning, Lan gets up and listen to
music. every afternoon she comes home and does
the housework. then she watches T.V . Every
evening she reads and does her homework.
<b>+Presentation text:(5’) A3 P.53:(Here are some Ss </b>
and their routines after school.
- Ask and answer about the routines after school
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>*Form:-</b><i><b>What do/does + S + do + after school?</b></i>
<i><b> S+ V / V(s/es)…</b></i>
<b>2.Practice:(10ms)</b>
+Picture drill: A3 P.53.-T run through the cues
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
*Model<i>: A:What do you do after school? </i>
<i> B: I watch TV.</i>
<i>A:What deos Lan do after school? </i>
<i>B:She do his homework.</i>
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to
repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks Ss’ practicing in
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
+Noughts and crosses:
<b>He/play</b>
<b>games</b>
<b>She/brush her</b>
<b>teeth</b>
<b>Lan/ do the</b>
<b>house work</b>
<b>Ba/ get</b>
<b>dressed</b>
<b>Nam/ go to</b>
<b>school</b>
<b>Thu/ do her</b>
<b>homework</b>
<b>She/ wash her</b>
<b>face</b>
<b>He/ Have</b>
<b>breakfast</b>
<b>Mai/listen to</b>
<b>music</b>
*Example exchange:
<i>S1: What does Ba do every morning?</i>
Copy down
- Copying down the words
listening to the sentences & take
note the right order.
- Checking & correcting
Answer keys:
<i>1..(to) listen to music </i>
<i> 3. (to) watch TV</i>
<i>2.(to) do the houseworks </i>
<i> 4.(to) read</i>
- Reading the dialogue in
individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
- <i><b>What does Ba do after </b></i>
<i><b>school ?</b></i>
<i><b>He watches TV.</b></i><sub> </sub>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.
- Making sentences for the next
cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>Model sentence:</b>
<b> - What does [Ba / Lan…] do </b>
<b>after school ?</b>
<b> –[ He/She] watches TV.</b>
<b>- Working in groups to choose the</b>
cue & make the question & the
answer.
<i>S2: [ He gets dresses ].</i>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>*Revision</b>:(3ms)<b>+Pelmasim: </b>
<b>1. Go to do listen to watch</b>
<b>2. school homework music TV</b>
<b>1.Presentation:(12ms)</b>
<b>+Pre teach: (Vocabulary)</b>
(to) play volleyball: Chơi bóng chuyền
(to) play football (soccer):Đá bóng
(to) play sports: Chơi thể thao
(a) girl: Cơ gái, cô bé, bạn gái
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
+Checking: R.O.R
+Presentation dialogue: A5 P.54: Show the
pictures
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue.
- Asks Ss practice the dialogue in groups & in
pairs.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to
practice in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Grid: asks ss to read the dialogue and make a
grid about Nga, Thu, Lan, Vui, girls with answer
key(*)
Survey:
Name Volleyba
ll
Football
Vui
Nga
Lan
Thu
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
Work in 2 groups
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Practicing the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Model sentence:
<i>Do you / they play volleyball ? </i>
<i>-Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they </i>
<i>don’t.</i>
<i>Does she / he play soccer ?</i>
<i>-Yes, she / he does ; No, she / he </i>
<i>doesn’t</i>
-Filling in the table in individual,
correcting
+Yes/ no question answer drill: A6 P.53.Show a
picture then Introduce the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to
repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>Example exchange:</b>
<i>a,S1:Do you play sports?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do/ No, I don|<sub>t</sub></i>
<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
<b>Find someone who? Name </b>
...watches T.V Ba √
...Plays football
...does the housework
...Plays volleyball
...listen to music
...reads
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
individual to interview each other by making the
Yes / No question & fill the information in the
table.
-Examples with Ss & fill the information in the
table .
- Asks Ss to go around & ask the other.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Making sentences for the next
cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
S1: Do you / they play
volleyball ?
S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they
don’t.
S1: Does she / he play soccer ?
S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he
doesn’t
<b>- Working in to work in individual</b>
to interview each other by making
the Yes / No question & fill the
information in the table.
<b>- Going around & ask the other to</b>
get the information to fill the
information in the table
<b>Example exchange:</b>
S1:Do you watch T.V?
S2: Yes, I do
S1: What is your name?
S2:{...}
S1: How do you spell it?
<b>III.Consolidation:(1m)</b>
- Retell the main contents of the lesson.
- Ask Ss give the form of yes/ no questions
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Learn by heart vocabulary and some structures grammar.
- Do exercises in workbook
- Prepare for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period : 27+28</b>
<b>B. MY ROUTINE</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
- To Help Ss read and understand a picture story about Ba’s daily activities using
present simple tense. Develop 4 skills.
By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice simple present tense by reading a
-Ss practise 4 skills fluently.
<b>B/ Preparation: - Computer and projector</b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (6’) – Questions: Ask Ss to ask and answer using Yes/No qs.</b>
1.You / listen to music / yes
2. She / play / volleyball / No
*Keys: 1. Do you listen to music ? Yes, I do.
2. Does she play volleyball? No, she does not.
- Corrects , remarks and give marks.
<b> III.New lesson(34’):</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>*Revision</b>:(3ms)+Jumbled words:
- okhueowsr= housework
- tislen= listen / - ader= Read
- ypal= Play / - cthaw= Watch
<b> 1.Pre- reading</b>
<b>*Pre teach :(Vocabulary)</b>
(to) take a shower: tắm vòi hoa sen(picture)
(to) eat: ăn (mine)
(to) start: bắt đầu (meaning)
(to) finish :kết thúc (antonym of start)
(to) have lunch :ăn trưa (picture)
(to) go to bed: đi ngủ (picture)
(a) Quarter: 1/4 , 15 phút ( explain)
<b>+Checking</b>: what and where
<b>+Open predition:B2 P.57: </b><i>Set the scene: You are </i>
<i>going to read about Ba’s routines.(Run through the </i>
<i>table(57)</i>
Work in 4 groups
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
Work in groups
-Guessing the times on which Ba
does his daily routine & fill in the
-Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to guess the times
on which Ba does his daily routine & fill in the table
part 2 on p 57.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
- Get feedback.
<b>Presentation text: B2 – P56.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Asks Ss check their prediction.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>Grid: B2 – P57.</b>
-Asks Ss to read the dialogue in & fill in the table in
individual.
<b>2. While reading:(15ms)</b>
+Read the text about Ba & check their predictions.
To fill in the tables about Ba and Their friends(you)
Get feedback
<b>3.Post reading:(8ms)* B3(57) Questions and </b>
<b>answers</b>
+ Ask ss to complete the last column in the B2
+Asks ss to do B3.P.57 – Read questions loudly.
-Gives the requirement & ask Ss to work in groups of
tables to ask each other the questions :
a./ What time does Ba get up / Go to school / have
classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to bed ?
b./ What time do you get up / Go to school / have
classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to bed ?
& fill the answers in the box on the grid .
- Asks Ss to report the information about their friends.
-Corrects & comments.
<i><b>a) </b></i><b>Answer:</b>
<i><b>+ Ba</b> get(s) up at 6.00.</i>
<i> go(es) to school 6.45.</i>
<i> has/have classes 7.00 – 11.15.</i>
<i><b> + I</b> has / have lunch 11.30.</i>
<i> go(es) home 5.00.</i>
<i> go(es) to bed 10.00</i>
<i><b>b)Survey</b></i>:-Ss use qs in B3-b to ask their friends to fill
- Get feedback
Eg: What time do you get up?
I get up at half past five.
- Giving their prediction.
- Reading the text .
- Checking the prediction.
<b>Action</b> <b>Time</b>
<b>Ba</b> <b>You</b>
Get up 6.00 6.15
Go to school 6.45
Classes start 7.000
Classes finish 11.15
Have lunch 11.30
Go home 5pm
Go to bed 10pm
-Filling in the table in individual,
Read the text in individially
Work in pairs
Work in individially
Work in pairs
<b>* Survey:</b>
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms) </b>
<b>- Asks the form of yes/ no question</b>
- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do the daily
routine:<i><b>- What time does Ba get up ?</b></i>
<i><b> - He gets up</b></i>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do
the daily routine. Do Exercise: write the time on which your family members do their
daily routines ( base on the table B2 P 57).Write a passage about themselves using the
informations in column “me” of B2.
<b>-</b> Prepare the picture on page 58 for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 29+30</b>
<b>C. CLASSES</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
<b>-</b> To teach Ss school subject vocabulary with “What do we have today? –We have +
name of subject” to talk about the school timetable and help Ss develop 4skills.
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about school timetable with have and
don|<sub>t have fluently, to practise school subjects vocab with “what do we have to day?</sub>
– We have …” -Ss practise 4 skills fluently.
<b>B/ Preparation: - Computer and projector</b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (6’) – 2 Ss to go to the board and writing about themselves.B2.</b>
<b>Keys: - I get up at half past five.I go to school at sixfifteen.I have classes at 7 </b>
o’lock.I have lunch at aquarter to twelve. …
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>I.Presentation:(15ms)</b>
<b>+Pre teach: (vocabulary)</b>
-(a) timetable(realia): thời khóa biểu
- English (Translation): Tiếng Anh
-Math(Realia): Mơn Tốn
- Literature(realia): Mơn ngữ văn
- History(Realia): Môn lịch sử
- Geography (Realia): Môn địa lí
- Monday (Realia)Thứ hai
<b>*Check: Introduces the words by explaining the</b>
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
<b>+Checking: ordering vocab</b>
Reads: first we have literature. Then we have
Goegraphy . At 8 .40 we have English and then
we have math. At 10.15 we have history . this is
our timetable on Monday.
<b>+Presentation text: C1 P.58:Ask and answer </b>
about the school timetable:
Set the scene: They are Ba and Hoa.They are
talking about their timtable.
Listen to the conversation(twice) then read
whisper
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Checks S’s reading & the ordering.
- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to
practice in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Word cue drill:
<b>English/ 7.00 Math/ 8.00</b>
<b>Literature/ 8.40 History/ 9.35</b>
<b> Geography/ 10.15 </b>
<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
Listen and work in individially
-Marking the vocabularies in order.
<b>- Giving their ordering.</b>
3. English 4.Math 1.Literature
5.History 2.Geography 6.Monday
- Reading the text & practicing the
model in groups & in pairs.
- Checking the ordering.
* Model sentence
-What do we have today ? (?)
- We have English (+).
- I don’t have my timetable (-).
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
S1: <i>What do we have today ?</i>
<i> S2: We have English.</i>
<i> S1: What time does it start ?</i>
<i> S2: [ 7.00 ]. </i>
+Mapped dialogue:
What...today? History
What time....start? 7.50
Do we...literature... 8.40 No, ...English
What time...finish... 9.25
What .... at 9.35? Geography
Do we....math? yes, ...1015
+ Devide the class in to 4 groups. Each group
has to dictation the following sentences.
G1: On Monday, we have history.It starts at one
p.m and finishes at two- forty.
G2: We have EL.It starts at one fifty – five and
G3: We have Math.It starts at two forty and
finishes at three thirty – five.
G4: We have physics.It starts at three forty five
and finishes at four thirty.
T checks and decides the winner
- Practicing the dialogue in chorus.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Correcting pronunciation & the
mistakes
Example exchange:
S1: What do we have today ?
S2: We have history.
S1: What time does it start ?
S2: At 7.15
S1: Do we have literature at 8.40 ?
S2:No, we don’t. We have English.
S1: What time does it finish ?
S2: At 9.25
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>+Pre teach: (Vocabulary)</b>
-Monday: Thứ 2
-Tuesday:(realia): Thứ 3
-Wednesday: :(realia): Thứ 4
-Thursday: :(realia): Thứ 5
-Friday: :(realia): Thứ 6
-Saturday: :(realia): Thứ 7
-Sunday: :(realia): CN
+ Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
*<b>Checking</b>: Listen and read .sing a song
follow the video clip.
+Predict dialogue:(answer key C3.P.59)
-Introduces the dialogue & asks Ss to work
in pairs to predict the missing words of the
Work individually
Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially
Copy down
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
dialogue & fill in.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to check
their prediction.
-Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
-Corrects S’s pronunciation.
Nga: When do we have...?
Ba: We have it on...and...
Nga: When do have...?
Ba: We have it on...and...
Nga: Does Lan have math on...?
<b>2.Practice:(15ms)</b>
+Board drill:
- Introduces the timetable & the example
exchange & Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>3.Production:(7ms)</b>
+Asks ss to fill in their real timetable( only
five subjects they have learn in English) in
C2 P.59
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in individual to write about their
weekly timetable.
- Asks Ss to give their timetable.
- Corrects & comments.
+Asks ss to write :
We have math on ...and..., ..
work in individially to match the words
in English with the words in VietNamese
-Predicting the missing words of the
dialogue & filling in.
- Giving & Checking their prediction.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Correcting pronunciation.
Dialogue: ( With answer keys )
Nga: When do we have ( history ) ?
Ba: We have it on (Tuesday) &
(Thursday).
Nga: When do we have ( math ) ?
Ba: We have it on (Mon),( Wed) &
(Fri).
Nga: Does Lan have math on (Friday)?.
Ba: ( No, she doesn’t ).
Predict the missing words in groups
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
S1: When do we have Math ?
S2: On Monday, Wednesday &
Saturday
- Working in individual to write about
their weekly timetable.
- Giving the timetable.
* Example sentence: We have math on
….,… and …… We have English on
….etc.
<b>IV.Consolidation:(1m): -Retell the main points of this lesson.</b>
Asks the way to use Has/ Does not have
- Ask Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the weekly timetable:
S1: When do we have Math ?
S2: On Monday, Wednesday & Saturday
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the model sentence.
- Exercise: write about your weekly timetable.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 31</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
-To teach Ss the day of the week & Wh-qs : “When do/does +S + have + school
subject ?
S + have/has +it + on + days of the week..”.To talk about the weekly timetable.
To help Ss develop 4skills.(especially speaking skill)
- By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice in simple present tense, tell the
time, adjective with be, question words, school subjects, days of week.
*Revise present simple tense:
<b>1)To be: + S + am/is/are… / - S + am/is/are + not …</b>
? Am/Is/Are + S …? – Yes,S+am/is/are: - No,S+am/is/are + not.
<b>? Wh-question words + am/is/are +S…?</b>
<b>2) Ordinary verb: + S + V / Vs / V(es)… [ 0 / x / ss / ch /sh + es]</b>
- S + do not / does not + V (infinitive) …
<b> ? Do /Does + S + V(infinitive)….?- Yes,S+do/does ; - No,S+ do / does + not.</b>
<b>? Wh –question word + do /does,+ S + V(infinitive) …?</b>
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.
<b>B/ Preparation:</b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up:</b>
<b> III.New lesson(34’):</b>
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Telling the time</b>(10M)+Realia drill:
Grammar practice:2 P.60
+ What time is it? –It’s …
- Introduces the example exchange & the
picture then helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Dictatation:
T reads: 1.45, 5.30, 8.15, 8.50, 12.00, 6.20,
3.30, 11.15, 10.25, 3.5, 2.40, 6.30, 9.00, 4.35.
<b>2.Question words(10m).</b>
+Grammar practice: 4 P.61
+ Ask Ss give question words:What ,where,
when, how, who, which, why.
-Ask Ss discuss in pairs and fill in the gaps.
-Get feedback.
a) where b) How c) what
d) How e) which f) which
+Noughts and crosses:
Le loi street / 2 floors / N-G- A
<b>3.Adj with be (10m)</b>
Grammar practice: 3 P.61
+Word cue drill: Run through the cues.
House school city
country street Family living room
Example exchange
S1: Is your {house} big?
S2: Yes,it is /No it is not.
<b>4.Present simple tense(10)</b>
+Find Someone who… ?
Name Find Someone who…?
...gets dressed
...go to bed at 10.00
...eats a big breakfast
...have lunch
...plays volleyball after school
...does the housework
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
individual to interview each other by making
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
Example exchange:
S1:What time is it?
S2: It is seven
+-Practice in groups.
-How do you spell your name ?
-What do you have today ?
-What time do you get up ?
-Which grade are you in ?
-When do you have math ?
-What time do you go to school ?
-What do you do after school ?
-What do you do in the afternoon ?
Work in pairs
<b>- Working in to work in individual to</b>
interview each other by making the Yes /
No question & fill the information in the
table.
in the table.
-Examples with Ss & fill the information in
the table.
- Asks Ss to go around & ask the other.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
<b>+word cue drill:</b>
Mon / Tue/ Wed / Thur / Fri /
Sat
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
S1: What do you have on Monday ?
S2: We have [math] & {English].
S1: Do you have [history] on Monday ?
S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
<b>III.Consolidation(2m):-Retell the main points of this lesson.</b>
Do grammar practice 1 P.60 and 5-7 P.61
- Asks Ss to summarize the use of all the grammars.
<b>IV.Homework(2m) : - SS finish their exercises in P.60,61</b>
- Study the grammar & the model sentences.
- Prepare the picture on page 62.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 32+33</b>
<b>-</b> Help Ss read the text about where Thuy lives. Ss develop 4skills.
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson ss will be able to read and understand the text describing
where Thuy lives,revise present simple tense with Wh-qs, Who’s that?, who are
those?, town and country vocabulary.
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books, revise unit 4
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (6’) – 2 Ss to go to the board and put the verbs in correct form:</b>
<b>1.</b> Every evening,my father(watch )……. TV.
<b>2.</b> Nam (be) ………… my friend.He ( play) ………… soccer everyday.
*Keys: 1. Watches 2. Is/ plays
- Corrects , remarks and give marks.
<b> III.New lesson(34’)</b>:
<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
<b>1.Pre reading</b>(8ms)
A flower: (Picture) : Bông hoa
A rice paddy: (Picture): Cách đồng
A park: (Picture): Công viên
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: What and where:
+Open prediction:
What are near Thuy<b>|<sub>s house?</sub></b>
<b>2.While reading(18ms)</b>
+Check their predictions: Asks ss to read
+Ordering vocabulary: P.62:
T reads thesecond bubble aloud: “ It is
beautiful here .There is a river and……
near our house.”
Answer key: a lake-2 Trees-4
A river-1 Flowers-5
A rice paddy-6 A park-3
+Matching: Asks ss to read the text again
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
-Ss enjoy the game.
- Predicting “What’s near Thuy’s house”
& write 3 things in their books.
- Giving the prediction.
- Reading the text .
and guess the meaning of these words
from context and match(with anwer key)
Near khách sạn
A yard Xinh đẹp
Beautiful gần nhà
A hotel Sân
+Comprehension questions: A1P.62
Questions: a-f
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer. Then give the
keys.
-Corrects & comments.
Questions:
1./ How old is Thuy ?
2./ What does she do ?
3./ What’s her brother’s name ?
4./ How old is he ?
5./ Where does Thuy live ?
6./ What’s there, near Thuy’s house<i><b> ?</b></i>
<b>3.Post reading (7ms)</b>
+Picture drill:P.62 or P.63
- Introduces the pictures 0n page 62/63 &
the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
+Write it up: A3 P.63
-Matching the meaning of the words from
the context
-Comparing & giving the information.
-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving
the keys.
Answer:
1./ She is twelve years old.
2./ She is a student.
3./ Her brother’s name is Minh.
4./ He is twenty.
5./ Thuy lives in a house.
6./ A lake, a rice paddy, a park, a river, a
hotel
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
A: What’s that ?
B: It’s a [river].
A: What are those ?
B: They are [trees].
<b>TEACHER'S activitives</b> <b>STUDENTS' activities</b>
<b>Presentation:</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>
(a) village : làng
(a) town : phố , thị trấn, thị xã.
* Listen: A4(64):
Ask Ss guess the words and then listen and
check their predict.
Ask Ss listen twice.
-Get feedback
*keys:
-Listening to the tapecript
Twice.
a) hotel
b)city
c)River
*A5(64)
- Set the scene : near our house, there are many
things, now look at the pictures and describe
<i><b>Eg: There is a hotel near our house.</b></i>
<i><b>There are trees near our house.</b></i>
* Revision:
<b>There is + a/an + n - số ít</b>
<b>There are + n - số nhiều.(V s/es).</b>
<b>* Practice: </b>
- run through 6 pictures: a hotel / trees / ….
Ask Ss write sentences as model sentence.
<i><b>There is … /;There are …</b></i>
<b>-</b> T-WC, individual.
Write, T corrects mistakes.
There are trees near my house
There is a lake near our house
There is a school near our house
There is rice paddy near my house
There are trees and flowers in the park
near my house.
<b>Note: </b>
/s/:khi từ có tận cùng là âm /t/, /p/, /f/, /k/, /th
/iz/: tận cùng là các chữ cái:ce x, z, sh, ch, s, ge.
/z/: Các âm còn lại
- Copying down the words listening to the
sentences & take note the right order.
- Checking & correcting
- Do exercises 5(P.64)
- Work in groups of 3 or 4
*Answer keys:
<i><b>There is a hotel near my house</b></i>
<i><b>There is a park near our house</b></i>
<i><b>There is a river near my house</b></i>
<i><b>…</b></i>
Write about some places near their
house
- Work individually
-Working in pairs to answer. Then
giving the keys.
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION(1’) : -T sums up:</b>
How to describe place using :
<b>There is … / There are…</b>
-Retell /s/ ;/ Iz/ ; /z/
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks(1’):
- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.
- Do exercises
- Prepare for next lesson.
E.g.
Units / 'ju:nits/ Stops / stɒps/ Topics / 'tɒpiks / Laughes / lɑ:fs/ Breathes /
bri:ðs/
- /iz/:Khi từ có tận cùng là các âm /s/, /z/, /∫/, /t∫/, /ʒ/, /dʒ/ (thường có tận cùng là các chữ
cái ce, x, z, sh, ch, s, ge)
E.g.
Classes / klɑ:siz/ washes /wɒ∫iz/ Watches / wɒt∫iz/ Changes /t∫eindʒiz/
- /z/:Khi từ có tận cùng là nguyên âm và các phụ âm hữu thanh còn lại
E.g.
Plays / pleiz/
Bags / bægz/
speeds / spi:dz/
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 34</b>
<b>-</b> To help Ss read and understand the text about Minh and where he lives,town
vocabulary and prepositions of places.
<b>-</b> To help Ss develop 4 skills.
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the details & town
vocabulary & prepositions of place(next to, in,near..)
<b>-</b> Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and listening skills)
<b>B/ Preparation: Computer and projector</b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (6’) </b>
<b>EX6(64) : R and R dialogue.</b>
-Elicit the dialogue, rub out nouns,call Ss write them again
- Corrects , remarks and give marks.
<b>TEACHER'S activities</b> <b>STUDENTS' activities</b>
<b>**PRE-READING :</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary( 8’)</b>
(a)book) store (n); Cửa hàng sách(Visual )
(a) restaurant (n); Nhà hàng (picture)
(a) temple (n); Miếu thờ (picture)
(a) hospital (n); Bệnh viện (picture)
(a) factory (n): Nhà máy (picture)
(a)museum (n):Bảo tàng(picture)
(a)stadium (n): Sân vận động (example)
(a) neighborhood: vùng lân cận, hàng xóm.
(trans)
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
<b>+Check :Slap the board</b>
<b>* True / False prediction:6’</b>
-Introduces the statements & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict what is near Minh’s house.
-Asks Ss to compare their prediction.
-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Comments.
*Answer keys: 1./ T; 2./ F; 3./ T;
<b>*WHILE-READING: 10 M.</b>
<b>2.Presentation text: B1-P65.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Asks Ss check their prediction.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>* Comprehension questions: B1-P66.</b>
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
pairs to choose the True / False statements &
complete the sentences.Then give the keys.
-Corrects & comments.
True / False statements: B1-P66
1./ Minh lives in the country.
2./ There are four people in his family.
3./ Their house is next to a bookstore.
4./ There is museum near their house.
Complete the sentences:
1./ Minh & his family live in the ...
2./ On the street, there is a...,a...& a...
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copy down the words.
-enjoying the game.
- Working in pairs to predict.
- Comparing their prediction.
-Giving their prediction.
* Statements: Near Minh’s house
1./ There is a restaurant.
2./ There is a lake..
3./ There is a hospital.
- Reading the text .
- Checking the prediction.
-Working in pairs to answer. Then
giving the keys.
5./ Minh’s mother works in a
factory.
6./ Minh’s father works in a
hospital
Answer key:
1../ F; 2./ T; 3./ F; 4./ T; 5./ F;
6./ F;
Answer key:
1./ Minh & his family live in the
CITY.
2./ On the street, there is a
4./ His father work in a ...
<b>**.POST -READING (10 M)</b>
<b>3. Dictation: B3 - P67.</b>
- Reads the words in the box & asks Ss to
listen & rewrite the words they hear.
- Asks Ss to compare their copying.
- Reads the words again to help Ss to check.
- Asks Ss to give the words they copied.
3./ His mother works in a
HOSPITAL.
4./ His father work in a
FACTORY.
Listening & rewriting the words
they hear.
- Comparing their copying.
- Checking the words.
-- Asks Ss to give the words they
copied.
a Museum Stadium Temple Hospital
b Restaurant Store Bookstore Factory
c Park River Lake Yard
d Hotel House Street Tree
<b>IV. Consolidation(2’)- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.</b>
Retell the text about Minh and where he lives, how to describe places and surroundings .
Revision present simple
<b>V. Homework (2’)</b>
Learn by heart vocabulary and read a text again, finish all exercises.
- Exercise: write about your house and you family members.
- Prepare the place vocabulary.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 35+36</b>
<b>-</b> By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to listen,read,and understand the paragraph
and know some prepositions of position.And use preposition to describe the
position of the house.
<b>-</b> Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and listening skills)
<b>B/ Preparation: Computer and projector</b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (6’) </b>
T helps Ss revise the following words using the game: “Boardback”
<b>+ a hotel + a lake + a hospital + a yard </b>
<b> + a rice paddy + a factory + a flower </b>
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
<b> III.New lesson(34’)</b>
<b>TEACHER'S activities</b> <b>STUDENTS' activities</b>
<b>*Pre-teach:</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>
- in front of:((prep.) Ở phía trước(example)
- behind(prep.) phía sau (relia)
- to the left of…/ to the right of…: (prep.): phía bên
trái của / phía bên phải của ….(example)
- Look at (v) nhìn vào(trans)
- (a) Well: cái giếng( visual )
- (a) mountain : núi( visual )
- Tall (adj) Cao ( antonym)
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
<b>+Check:R and R</b>
<b>**PRESENTATION </b>
<b>2. Presentation text: C1 - P68.</b>
<b>set the scene: There is a house and something</b>
around (picture Page 68)
-Ask Ss to listen and read the text and underline the
prepositions
<b>*PRACTICE (15 M)</b>
<b>3. Comprehension questions: C1 - P68.</b>
* Example exchange;
S1: Where is the tree ?
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs
by repeating the position of the
tree.
- Corrects the pronunciation &
mistakes.
* <i>next to the house/ near the </i>
<i>house </i>
<i> in front of the house</i>
<i> behind the house </i>
<i> to the left of the house </i>
<i> to the right of the house </i>
- Reading the text in groups & in
pairs.
- Corrects the pronunciation &
mistakes.
S2: It’s [next to] the house.
- Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in groups &
in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & mistakes.
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
pairs to answer. Then give the keys.
-Corrects & comments.
Questions:
1./ Where is the yard ?
2./ Where are the tall trees ?
3./ Where are the mountains ?
4./ Where is the well ?
5./ Where are the flowers ?
6./ Where is the house ?
<b>* Picture drill. C1 - P68.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to
repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>*Further practice(7’)</b>
<b>+ C2(69): Run through the 3 qs and 6 pictures</b>
Ask Ss to listen and match the Qs with the right
pictures (the right answer)
-Get feedback
* Write it up:
Ask Ss to write sectences describing the house
they’ve chosen.
Model: Ba lives in abeautiful house. There is/are
….
- Let Ss write and check some Ss
Then giving the keys.
Answer:
1./ It’s in front of the house ?
2./ They are behind the house ?
3./ They are behind the tall trees ?
4./ It’s in to the left of the house?
5./ They are to the right of the
6./ It’s behind the yard ?
- Repeating in chorus & in
individual.
- Making sentences for the next
cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
S1: Where are the [mountains] ?
S2: They are [behind] the tall
trees.
Keys:
a) Picture A
b) Pic B
c) Pic B
Eg:This is Ba’s house. To
the left of the house , there
is …
-Write individually
<b>TEACHER'S activities</b> <b>STUDENTS' activities</b>
<b>*PRESENTATION </b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:</b>
- (a) drug store: Cửa hàng thuốc tây
(picture)
- (a) toystore: cửa hàng đồ chơi (picture)
- (a) movie theater: Rạp chiếu phim
(picture)
- Listening to the words.
-(a)police station: đồn cơng an (picture)
-(a) bakery: Tiệm bánh mì (picture)
- between(prep.) Ở giữa (rexample)
- opposite(prep.) đối diện (example)
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>+Check vocabulary:slap the board</b>
Ss Listen to the disc and look at the text
books(twice)
- Introduces the text & helps Ss to read
in groups & in pairs.
- Check S’s reading & Corrects S’s
pronunciation & mistakes.
<b>*Give forms: S + to be + prep +</b>
<b>N(place)</b>
<b>PRACTICE 15 M.</b>
<b>3.Picture drill. C4 a) - P70.</b>
Run through the picture of a street.
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.
Reads the first model for example
-Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.
<b>*Guessing game: C4 b) - P71. </b>
- Asks Ss to write a place in the picture
on page 70 on a piece of paper.
- Asks Ss to make Yes/ No – questions to
guess the place in the paper & change
the role.
- Comments the game.
Example:
It’s opposite the movie theater. What is
it ?
It’s is the police station.
Yes, that’s right.
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Reading the text in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects the pronunciation &
mistakes.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*<i><b>Example exchange:</b></i>
<i><b> S1: Where are the [...] ? </b></i>
<i><b> S2: It’s opposite the...</b></i>
<i><b> It’s between the ...and the...</b></i>
- Writing a place in the picture on page
70 on a piece of paper.
- Making Yes/ No – questions to guess
the place in the paper & change the
role.
* Statements:
1./ It’s opposite the bakery.
2./ it’s between the bakery & the
drugstore.
3./ It’s next to the bakery.
4./ It’s opposite the bookstore.
5./ It’s next to the movie theater.
- Working in pairs to interview each
other about the places near their house
& take note the information & fill in
<b>* PRODUCTION 10 M</b>
<b>***. Survey: C5 -P71.</b>
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to interview each other
about the places near their house & take
note the information & fill in the table.
-Asks Ss to report the information.
- Corrects & comments.
S1: What’s [in front of] your
house ?
S2: [ A rice paddy].
Name In front of be
hind
opposite to the left
of
to the right
of
Near
Hoa A Rice
paddy
…
…
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION (2 M ):</b>
-Asks Ss to give the questions & model sentence used to ask & answer the position of
things near the house & the preposition of places:
S1: Where are the [...] ?
S2: It’s opposite the...
It’s between the ...and the...
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homeworks: (2M)</b>
- Study model sentence & the questions.
- Consolidate all the model sentences & the grammars & redo the exercise
in the student’s book to prepare for the forty-five minute test.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>TEST & CHECK</b>
<i><b>Time: 45’(No 2)</b></i>
<b>I. The aims and requests</b>
evaluate Ss, level exactly.
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to do the test well.
- Develop Ss’ skills in doing a written test.
<b>II. Pereparation</b>
1. Teacher: Written test (photocopy test)
2. Students: preparation for the test.
<b>III.</b>
<b> Procedures</b>
<b>1. Organization (1’): – Greetings and checking attendance </b>
<b>2. Content of the test</b>
<b>3. Collect the test </b>
<b>4. Homework (30'')</b>
<b>I.C hoose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)</b>
<b>1.This is my...</b>
a.hello <b>b.hi</b> <b>c.family</b> <b>d.fine</b>
<b>2.We are in the ...</b>
<b>a.living room </b> <b>b.window </b> <b>c.table</b> <b>d.door</b>
<b>3.There are four...in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I.</b>
<b>a.dogs </b> <b>b.people</b> <b>c.window</b> <b>d.chairs</b>
<b>4. My mother is thirty-five...old.</b>
<b>a.year </b> <b>b.years</b> <b>c.age</b> <b>d.ages</b>
<b>5. She is a...</b>
<b>a.doctors</b> <b>b.engeneer</b> <b> c.teachers</b> <b>d.student</b>
<b>6. We...on Tran Hung Dao street..</b>
<b>a.address</b> <b>b.is</b> c.live <b>d.are</b>
<b>7. ...are you? I am fine, thanks.</b>
<b>a.Where </b> <b>b.what</b> <b>c.How</b> <b>d.Who</b>
<b>8. Is this ... friend? -Yes, he’s my friend.</b>
<b>a.his</b> <b>b.her</b> <b>c.my</b> <b>d.your</b>
<b>9. This is...eraser ?</b>
<b>a. on</b> <b>b. an</b> <b>c. a</b> <b>d.in</b>
<b>10. What is your...? -My name is Lan.</b>
<b>a.name</b> <b>b.student</b> <b>c.teacher</b> <b>d.friend</b>
<b> II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)</b>
1_______ 2________3_________4_________5_________6____________
<i>A</i> <i>B</i>
<i><b>1.</b>What is this?</i> <i>a. Yes,it is.</i>
<i><b>2</b>.Are these your pens?</i> <i>b. It’s a book.</i>
<i><b>3.</b>Is that your house?</i> <i>c.I live on Tran Phu </i>
<i>street.</i>
<i><b>4.</b>Who is that?</i> <i>d. No, it isn’t. It’s his </i>
<i>ruler</i>
<i><b>6.</b> Is this your ruler?</i> <i>f. That’s Mai</i>
<b>III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )</b>
a./ 25 = ……….…; b./ 75 = ……….… ;
c./ 30 = ………..…; d./ 100 = ……..………..;
My (1) ………is Lan. I (2) ……… twelve years old. I am
(3) ……….. student and I am (4) ………. grade 6. I am now live
(5) ………….. Huong Phung. There (6) ……….…. four people in my family.
<b>V.Complete these sentences. (2M).</b>
a./ Come……….…; b./ ………morning ;
c./ Sit ………..…; d./ ……….your book ;
e./ Open ………book ; f./ ………afternoon ;
g./ ……….up ; h./ ……….. night ;
<b>VI.Write the questions and the answer with “HOW MANY” (1M).</b>
a./ board / one: ………..………..……….
…;
b./ students / twenty: ……..………..………..
….;
c./ ruler / three: …………..……...………..……..………..……….
…;
d./ school – bag: ….………..………..……….
…;
<b> VII.Put the words in the corects order. (0,5m)</b>
<b>1. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.</b>
...
<b>2 . / my / this /teacher / is / .</b>
...
THE END
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<b>A.Is your house big?</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
-Helps Ss to listen and read a dialogue & read a letter about a house.
- By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the dialogue &
the letter.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially reading and listening skills)
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (5’) </b>
Questions: Ask 2 Ss rewrite vocabulary of unit 6
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
<b> III.New lesson(34’)</b>
<b>TEACHER'S activities</b> <b>STUDENTS' activities</b>
<b>*PRE-LISTENING :(5’).A2(72)</b>
<b>1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid)</b>
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs
to predict which the statements is true or false.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys &
Comments
- Get feedback
<b>*WHILE-LISTENING:8 M:</b>
<b>2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue
between Minh and Hoa & get the details.
- Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check the
prediction & Corrects.
<b>*PRE-READING:8 M</b>
<b>3. Vocabulary: </b>
(a) garden (n): Khu vườn( explaination)
(a) vegetable (n):rau(examples)
(a) photo (n):bức ảnh(realia)
(a)letter :lá thư (realia)
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
using the situation.
- Working in pairs to predict
which the statements is true or
false.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
Yes No
…big ? √
…small ? √
…a yard ? √
…a well ? √
…flowers √
… trees? √
- Listening to the dialogue &
getting the details.
- Listening to the dialogue &
checking the prediction.
- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning
& the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
*True / False statement prediction:
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs
to predict which the statements is true or false.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys &
Comments..
* Answer keys:
1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T;
<b>•WHILE-READING:8M</b>
<b>*Presentation text: A2-P73.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter & get the
details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.
<b>*Comprehension questions: A2/P73.</b>
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
pairs to match the questions to the answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the house ?
b. Is the house beautiful ?
c. Is there a flowers garden behind the house?
<b>•POST-LISTENING & READING :5 M</b>
<b>*Transformation writing:</b>
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in
individual to change the underlined information to
describe their own house & then draw a picture of
it as a photo .
- Asks Ss to give their information & comments.
- Working in pairs to predict
which the statements is true or
false.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
* Statements:
1. The house is in the country.
2. There is a river near the house.
3. There’re trees to the left of the
house.
4. There’re two gardens.
- Reading the letter & get the
details.
- Giving the main idea of the
letter.
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
A. Yes, it is.
B. No, it isn’t.
C. No, she isn’t.
D. Yes, there is..
E. No, there isn’t.
Answer:
a –D; b – A; c – E; d – E; e
– C.
- Writing in individual & giving
the information.
* My house:
There’s a flowers garden in front
of the house. There’s a vegetable
garden behind the house. To the
left of the house, there’s a lake.
<b>TEACHER'S activities</b> <b>STUDENTS' activities</b>
* PRESENTATION :8 M.
<b>1. Vocabulary: Slap the Board</b>
(a) bank (n);ngân hàng ( visual )
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
(a) clinic (n);trạm y tế, phòng khám tư
(explain )
-shops(n) cửa hàng, cửa hiệu (visual )
(a) post office (n) bưu điện (visual )
(a) supermarket (n)siêu thị(visual )
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
<b>2. Presentation dialogue:(6’) A1-P72.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to
practice.
- Checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
*
<b> PRACTICE: 10 M . </b>
<b>3. Picture drill: A3b) – P74.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b> FURTHER PRACTICE : 8M( Survey)</b>
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in groups to ask & answer about the
other’s house & take note the information into
the table.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
- Comments S’s information.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs
-Correcting the pronunciation.
- Practicing the model sentence in
groups & in pairs.
<i><b>•Model sentence:</b></i>
<i><b>*Is there a yard ? </b></i>
<i><b>Well?</b></i>
<i><b>- Yes, there is.</b></i>
<i><b>*Are there any flowers ?</b></i>
<i><b> trees?</b></i>
<i><b> – Yes, there are.</b></i>
<i><b> – No, there aren’t.</b></i>
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
S1: Is there [a hotel] near your
house ?
S2: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t.
S1: Are there any [shops] near your
house ?
S2: Yes, there are. / No, there aren’t.
- Working in groups to ask & answer
about the other’s house & taking note
the information into the table.
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION(2 M ): Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.</b>
Is there +a / an…? –Yes/ No .
Are there any …? Yes /No .
- Learn by heart vocabulary and all structures grammar.
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare for next lesson.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 41</b>
<b>B. Town or country?</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
- Helps Ss to read a text about Ba’s & Chi’s house to understand the differences
between town & country. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail
of the text & compare the life in city & the country.
-Helps Ss to practice in integrated skill to describe the place where they live. By the
end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe the place where they live.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially speaking and listening skills)
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (5’)</b>
Ask Ss to read their descriptions about their houses A3(74)
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
<b> III.New lesson(34’)</b>
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>*PRE-READING: 12 M.</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary: </b>
-a market (n):chợ (trans)
-an apartment (n):căn hộ (trans)
-paddy field = rice paddy (n) (synonyms)
-noisy ≠ quiet (adj) ồn ào> < yên tĩnh (antonym)
-a zoo (n):vườn bách thú (visual )
<b>*Check: R & R</b>
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning
& the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Kim’s game: B1 – P76/77.</b>
- Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to look at the
pictures to remember things in these picture.
- Hides the pictures & asks Ss to talk about the
things they saw. Using this model sentences:
- Comments the game.
<b>*WHILE-READING: 12 M</b>
<b>3. Presentation text: B1 – P76/77.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts about Ba’s
& Chi’s house & get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.
<b>*• Comprehension questions: B1 – P76.</b>
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs
to ask & answer the questions to the answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
<i><b>* Questions:</b></i>
a. Does Ba live in town ?
b. Does he live in a house ?
c. Is it noisy ?
d. Does Chi live in town ?
e. Are there any stores ?
f. Is it quiet ?
<b>• POST- READING:10M</b>
Word cue drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to
repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Looking at the pictures to
remember things in these picture.
- Talking about the things they saw.
Using the model sentences:
<i><b>* Model sentences:</b></i>
<i><b>1) + “There’s a zoo, a post</b></i>
<i><b>office…..”</b></i>
<i><b> + “There’s a lake, a river…..”</b></i>
<i><b>2)S1: Do you live in town ?</b></i>
<i><b> S2: No. I live in the country.</b></i>
<i><b> S1: Does he live in town ?</b></i>
<i><b> S2: No. He lives in the country.</b></i>
- Reading the letter & get the
details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Working in pairs to ask & answer
the questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>+</b><i><b>Town / country</b></i>
<i><b>+House / apartment</b></i>
<i><b>+ Lake/ river</b></i>
<i><b>+Hospital/ factory</b></i>
<b>*Compare:</b>
<b>In town</b> <b>In the country</b>
… it’s noisy
…we live in an apartment
…there aren’t any paddy
fields
…there is a zoo
… there are shops
… etc.
… it’s quiet
- Repeating in chorus & in
individual.
- Making sentences for the next
cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
S1: Do you live in town ?
S2: No. I live [ in the country ].
S1: Do you live near [ a lake ] ?
S2: No. I live [ near a river ].
+Supermarket/market
+ Shop / paddy field
+Zoo/ museum
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION (2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
The present simple tense: Do/Does + S + V(inf)…?-Yes/ No
<b>V.Homeworks: (2 M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts.
- Exercise: write a short paragraph to compare the differences
between town & country base on the information you have compared .
<b>-</b> Prepare the pictures on page 76 & 77.
<b>V. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 42 +43</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
-<i><b> </b></i>Helps Ss to practice in Simple present with ‘How’ questions & “by car / by bike /
by train …” to talk about transportation.
By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their moves.
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially speaking and listening skills)
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (5’)</b>
Revision ( 5 M ) : Guessing game
- Asks Ss to choose a place in town
(factory; museum; post office;…) &
complete the sentences strip & play the
game in groups.
- Corrects , remarks and give marks
Model sentence: B4 – P77.
<i>S1: Do you live near a part ?</i>
<i>S2: No, I don’t.</i>
<i>S1: Do you live near a bank ?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do..</i>
<b> III.New lesson(34’) </b>
<b> </b>
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
<b>PRESENTATION :12 ms</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: ROR: </b>
-by motorbike: bằng xe máy(visual)
-by train: bằng tàu hỏa(visual)
-by plane: bằng máy bay
Walk (v): đi bộ
+ Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Presentation text: C1-2/ P78-79.(5ms)</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss
to practice in groups & in pairs.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Reading the text in silence.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
<i><b>•How do you go to school ?</b></i>
<i><b> does he work ?</b></i>
<i><b> • I travel / go by bike.</b></i>
<i><b> •He travels / goes by car.</b></i>
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>PRACTICE ( 8ms).</b>
<b>3. Substitution drill: C1-2/ P78-79.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
* 11 pictures cues:
<i>Lien; Thu; Tuan; Hoa; Huong; Mr. Nam; </i>
<i>Mrs. Lan; Mr. Ba; Miss. Hoa; Mr Kim;</i>
<b>PRODUCTION (7 ms) </b>
<b>4. Noughts & Crosses:</b>
- Introduces the content & helps Ss to
practice the game in two groups.
- Asks Ss to choose the name to make the
question & answer.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
Mr Hai Mrs Lan Mrs Dung
Thu Mr Kim Lien
Tuan Miss Hoa Mr Ba
<i>S2: She goes by [bike].</i>
<i>S1: How does [Mr. Nam] travel to</i>
<i>work ?</i>
<i>S2: He travels by [train].</i>
- Practicing the game in two groups.
- Choosing the name to make the question
& answer.
Mr Hai Mrs Lan Mrs Dung
Thu Mr Kim Lien<sub> </sub>
Tuan Miss Hoa Mr Ba
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>PRE-READING (10 M).</b>
<b>1. Open prediction:</b>
<b>*</b><i>Set the scene: you are going to read the</i>
<i>text about Hoang.</i>
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in individual to predict what
time Hoang does the following things.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
Show a poster with the table.
Working in individual to predict what
time Hoang does the following things.
- Comparing & giving their prediction.
<i><b>What time?</b></i>
<i>He gets up</i> <i>5.30</i>
He leaves the house <i>6.30</i>
<i>School starts</i> <i>7.00</i>
<i>School ends</i> <i>11.30</i>
- Comments S’s prediction.
<b>WHILE-READING: 15 M</b>
<b>2. Presentation text: C4 – P80.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text
& get the details & check the prediction.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the
text.
- Corrects comments.
<b>3. Comprehension questions: C4 –</b>
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
<i><b>* Questions:</b></i>
<i>a. What time does Hoang get up ?</i>
<i>b. What time does he go to</i>
<i>school ?</i>
<i>c. Does he go to school by car ?</i>
<i>d. Does he walk to school ?</i>
<i>e. What time do classes start ?</i>
<i> f. What time do they end ?</i>
<b>*POST- READING: 10 M</b>
<b>4. Survey:</b>
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs to ask each other about
the time they do these things & fill the
information into the table.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
- Comments S’s information.
- Reading the text & getting the details &
checking the prediction
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Working in pairs to match the questions
to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
* Answers<i>:</i>
<i>a. Hoang gets up at 5.30.</i>
<i>b. He goes to school at 6.30.</i>
<i>c. No, he doesn’t.</i>
<i>d. Yes, he does.</i>
<i>e. Classes start at 7.00.</i>
<i> f. They end at 11.30</i>
Working in pairs to ask each other about
the time they do these things & filling the
information into the table.
- Comparing& reporting the information.
Mai Nam
Get up 5.30 5.45
Go to school <b>…</b>
Classes end
Go home
Have lunch
Ask and answer the questions.
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION (2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Retel the main points of the lesson: Present simple tense and Hoang’s routines.
<b>V.Homeworks (2 M ):</b>
<b>VI. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
Revision
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
-To Help Ss to review all structures grammar and vocabulary in Unit 7
- To help Ss improve their 4 skills.
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer with:
<b> “ Is there … and Are there ….?” </b>
<b> The verb “To Be”</b>
<b> Wh-qs … : How do/does + S + go /travel…? – By ….</b>
Ss practice 4 skills fluently
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan, word cues, a clock,cassette player and CD,poster.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
<b> C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (5’)</b>
-Ask Ss to ask and answer about transportation (su chuyen cho) using:
<i><b>+ Ba/go/School/car + Mrs Lien /travel/HN/plane</b></i>
<i><b> =>How does Ba go to school? => How does Mrs Lien travel to </b></i>
<i><b>HN?</b></i>
<i><b> He goes by car She travels by plane.</b></i>
<i><b> + Then T asks Ss some questions:</b></i>
What time does your father/mother get up?
What time do they leave the house?
Do they go to work by motorbike?
-Correct, remarks and give marks.
<b>III.New lesson(34’)</b>
<b>I/ Grammar:</b>
<i><b>Is there a/an + N + prep + N </b><b>(Place) </b><b>…?</b></i>
<i><b>Yes, there is</b></i>
<i><b>No,there isn’t</b></i>
<i><b>Are there + (any ) N(</b><b>s)</b><b> + prep + N</b><b>(place)</b><b> ?</b></i>
<i><b>Yes,there are</b></i>
<i><b>No,there aren’t</b></i>
<i><b>How do you go /travel….?</b></i>
<i><b>I go/travel by ….</b></i>
<i><b>How does he/she go/ travel ….?</b></i>
<i><b>He/she goes/travels by …</b></i>
<i><b>Do you live in town? Yes/No.</b></i>
<i><b>Does He/she live in city? Yes/No .</b></i>
<i><b>Wh-questions</b></i>
<i><b>To be</b></i>
<b>II/ Exercises:</b>
EX1: I/ Fill in each blank with the suitable
<b>preposition.</b>
1. Look _______________the house.
2. There is a big yard __________front _______ the
house.
3. There are many trees _____________the house.
4. There is a well____________the left of the house.
5. To the right_____________the house, there is a
garden.
6. I live _______________a house.
7. There are many people ______________the street.
8. They work ________________a restaurant.
9. Their house is next ____________a booksrore.
10.His father works _____________a factory.
11. The restaurant is __________the bakery and the
toystore.
12. The police station is ____________the bank.
13. There are many flowers ______________the park.
14. There is a river _____________our house.
15. The children are _______________the bookstore.
16. I get up …….6.00 every morning.
17. She has breakfast at 6.10. …the morning.
18.The toystore is ……….the drugstore.
19.My house is next …….the park.
-Retell some old
structures grammar.
-Copy down and explain
the meaning.
Give some example.
- Some Ss to come to the
board and write the for of
the structures
-Others copy down
Ss do exercises
Go to the board one by
Give answer keys.
<b>I/</b>
1.at
2.in front of
3.behind
4.to
5.of
6.in
7.on
8. in
9.to
10.in
11.between
12.near
13.in
14.near
15.in
16.at
17.in
18.opposite/ behind
19.to
20.in
21.on.
20.My grandmother lives …….Nghe An.
21. She has Literature ……… Monday and Friday.
EX 2:Use the suggested words to write a passage
<b>about Minh: Minh/ 12 years old.He/ grade 6. Everyday</b>
he/ get up/ six. He/ have breakfast/ half past six/ and he/
go to school/ aquarte/ seven. He/ walk/ school. He/ have
classes/ from seven/ eleven thirty. Now he/ in his room.
He/ watch TV.
EX 3: Fill in the missing words then answer the
<b>questions.</b>
Hello. My name (1) ...Lan. I’m twelve
(2) ...old. I’m a student. There (3)…………. four
people in my family. My father is(4)……….. engineer.
He is forty years(5)…………. My mother is a (6)
……….she teaches at a school near my house.
EX4: Read this passage and answer the questions.
I am Hoa. I get up at six every morning. I take a
shower , then I have a big breakfast. I go to school at a
quarter to seven. I have classes from seven to a quarter
past eleven. I have lunch at half past eleven. In the
afternoon, I play sports. I go home at five o’clock. In
the evening, I watch television, then I do my
homework. I go to bed at ten o’clock..
Questions:
1. When does she get up?
2. What time does she go to school?
3. Does she take a shower every morning?
4. What does she do then?
5. Does she have lunch at twelve?
6. What does she do at five o’clock?
7. What does she do in the evening?
8. What time does she go to bed?
<b>EX5: Choose the best answer:</b>
1. Are there ...trees behind the house?
A. any B.the C. those
2. This is a photo of Mai’s house. To the right of
...house there is a well.
A. the B. a C.
these
3. Is there ...garden behind the house?
A.a B. the C. any
4. There aren’t ...behind the house.
A. any trees B. any tree C. trees
5. In front of the house there is a ...
He’s in grade 6.
Everyday he gets up at 6 .
…
EX3:
1. Is 2.years
3.are 4.an
5.old 6.teacher.
EX4:
1. She gets up at 6
2. She goes to school
at a quarter to 7
3. Yes,she does
4. Then she has a big
…
5. No,she doesn’t
6. She goes home at
12
7. In the evening she
8. She goes to bed at
10.
- student to come to the
board and write the for of
the 2 structures
- Sts copy.
EX5:
A. beautiful flower garden B. Flower garden
beautiful
C. beautiful garden flower
6. I live in an apartment ...
A. in town B. in city C. in
the town
7. Is ...noisy in the country?
A.it B. there C.
every thing
8. The city is noisy, but the country is ...
A. quiet B. peace C.
silent
9. Chi ...in the country.
A. doesn’t live B. does lives C.
don’t live
10. I live in a house ...a garden.
A. with B. there is C.
has
11. I go to school ...
A. by bike B. by a bike C.
by the bike
12. ...does Miss Hoa go to school?
A. How B. What C.
By how
13. A.Mr Hai travels to work by train.
B. Mr Hai travels to the work by train.
C. Mr Hai travels to work by the train.
14. A. Mai walks to school.
B. Mai goes to school by walking
C. Mai goes walking to school.
15. I ... every day
A. walk home B. walk to the home C. walk
to home
16. The school is near my house. ...I walk.
A. so B. but C.
then
- Sts work in pairs
- Sts come to the board
and write on the bb.
- Sts work in pairs to do
exes
- Sts give their answers
One by one go to the
board to do exersies
<b>IV/ Consolidation:</b>
Retell the main points of this lesson.
<b>V/ Homework:</b>
Do all exercises
Prepare for next lesson.
<i>WEEK 17.</i>
<i>Date of preparing: 08/12/2010 - Date of teaching: 14/12/2010.</i>
<b>Period 47.</b>
<b>Unit 8: Out and About</b>
<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
- provide sts some new words
- Help sts practice listening, reading, speaking and writing skills
- Present progressive statements with I- we- you- they- he- she to talk about action
happening now
- By the end of the lesson students will be able to know some more about verbs
and know how to describe the actions that’s happening at the moment
Ss practice 4 skills fluently.(especially speaking and listening skills)
<b>B/ Preparation: </b>
<b> T’s: Lesson plan,cassette player and CD,poster,computer and projector.</b>
Ss’: Do the homeworks, EL books.
<b>C/ Procedure:</b>
<b> I.Organization(1’) – Greetings and checking attendance.</b>
<b> II.Checking up: (5’) – T shows some pictures and Ask some Ss to ask answer the </b>
questions:
<b> How do you go/travel ..? –I go/ travel by …</b>
<b> How does he go/ travel ..? – He goes / travels by…</b>
<b> III.New lesson(34’) Today I’ll introduce you the present progressive tense to talk</b>
about the actions happening at the moment
<b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’activities</b>
<b>I. Pre teach.(7’)</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary: T. elicits and models three times.</b>
+ T. checks meaning and pronunciation.
- ( to ) ride a bike: đi xe đạp<i> (Visual)</i>
- (to ) drive a car: lái xe ô tô<i> (Visual)</i>
- ( to ) wait for..: chờ,đợi ..<i> (Explanation)</i>
<i>- play video games</i>
* (to) learn: học bài (<i>Revision)</i>
* lesson (n): Bài học (<i>Revision)</i>
2. Checking vocabulary: Slap the board
<b>II. PRESENTATION: (8’)</b>
1. Dialogue build.
- Sts guess
- Sts repeat chorally first, then
individually.
- Sts copy
- Sts come to the board and rewrite
the words (one by one)
+ T. sets the scene
+ T- sts, sts- T
+ T. writes the dialogue but leave some blanks
+ T. calls 4 sts to come to the board and fill in the
gaps
Nam : Hi ! What are you doing, Hoa ?
Hoa : I am playing video games.
Nam : What is she doing ?
Hoa : She is learning her lessons.
<b>2. Concept check(10’)</b>
* Present progressive tense(Thì Hiện tại tiếp diễn)
<b>* Form :</b>
- Affirmative : S + am / is / are + V.ing.
<i>- </i><b>Interrogative : Am / is / are + S + V.ing ?</b>
<b>* Usage :Thì HTTD diễn tả 1 hành động đang xảy</b>
ra tại thời điểm nói.
<b>* Some adverbs used in the P. P. T</b>
- now, right now, at the moment, at present, at this
time
<b>III. PRACTICE(15’)</b>
– Picture cues drill and Word cue drill
+ T. runs though the word cues
+ T. makes an example
* Transformation writing
+ T. hangs up the poster
+ T. asks sts to work individually, change the
subject into other
+ T. checks
1. I am playing video games/ He
2. t am riding my bike/ She
3. I am driving my car/ Vinh
individually
- 4 sts come to the board and fill in
the gaps
- Sts give the form and use
- Sts copy
- Sts copy
- Sts repeat chorally and
individually
- Sts change the sentences
- 5 sts come to the board and write
They/ drive / a car
You/ do the homework
I/ read/ book
Tuan/ walk to the zoo
1. WH- questions used in the present progressive
+ T. sets the scene
+ T. gives the Y/ N question first
E. g. He is playing video games
→ Is he playing video games?
Yes, he is (No, he isn’t)
+ T. explain the example and asks 1 student come to
the board and write down the form
<b>2. Concept check</b>
* Present progressive tense (thì HTTD)
<b>* Form :</b>
<b>What + to be + S + Ving?</b>
<b>S + to be + Ving</b>
<b>* Usage : Ask and answer what people are </b>
<b>II. PRACTICE(8’) Picture drill A 2, 3 page 83</b>
+ T. runs though the pictures
+ T. makes an example
E.g. What is he doing?- He is doing homework
+ T- sts; sts- T
<b>III/ Further practice:</b>
<b>*Listening(7’) : A 4 / P.84.</b>
Listenand number the picture:
+ T. explains.
+ T. presses the tape.
+T. gives feedback
. Answer keys<i> :</i>
( businessman ( n ): Thương gia
1b 2f 3d 4a 5c 6e
* <i><b>Tape script :</b></i>
1. Mr Tam is a businessman. He’s driving home
from work.
2. Mrs Thanh is waiting at the station. The train
is late and she is very angry.
3. Nam and Quang are going around the city by
motorbike.
4. Viet is a student. He is riding his bike to
school.
5. Mai lives near her school. She’s walking from
school.
The boy is waiting for the bus downtown.
<b>* READING(11’)</b>
- Sts guess
- Sts repeat chorally first, then
individually.
- Sts copy
- 1 student comes to the board and
write the down the form
- Sts copy
- Sts repeat chorally first, then
individually
- Sts copy
- Sts- T; T- sts; open pairs; close
pairs
- Sts listen and number the picture
they hear.
- Sts go to the board to write
- Sts listen to the T
- Sts read the sentences and make
questions and answers
+ T. explains the words: Who, what, where, how
+ T. asks sts to read the sentences and make
questions and answers
<b>Questions:</b>
a ) Who is that ? What does he do ?
Where is he going ? How is he traveling ?.
b) Who is that ? What does she do ?
Where is she going ? How is she traveling ?
c )Who are they ?What do they do ?
Where are they going?How are they traveling ?
=> That is Mr Ha.
=> He is a businessman.
=> He is going to HaNoi.
=> He is traveling by plane
=> That is Miss Hoa.
=> She is a teacher.
=> She is going to school.
=> She is walking to school
=>They are Mr. Tuan and Mrs.
Vui.
=> They are doctors.
=>They are going to the hospital.
<b>1. Presentation text: A2 / P83 .</b>
Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss
to practice in groups & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Introduces the form & use of the grammar.
*<b>Present progressive WH- question:</b>
<b>+Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She+ V-ing?</b>
<b> We/ You/ They </b>
<b>+ Use: Asking about things happening</b>
<b>now.</b>
- Reading the text in silence.
- Practicing in groups & in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>
<b>- What ‘s (is) he / she doing ?</b>
<b> are you / they</b>
<b>- He / she ‘s (is) studying.</b>
<b> I ’m (am)</b>
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>2. Picture drill: </b>
Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i><b>* </b></i><b>Note</b><i><b>: using the pictures on page 83 for</b></i>
<i><b>the cues.</b></i>
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups with teacher & in
closed pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
+ Teacher – whole class drill:
a) S1: What‘s he doing ?
S2: He is doing his homework.
+ Closed pair work drill:
b) S1: What are they doing ?
S2: They’re waiting for a bus.
<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>
<b>3. Answer given: A6 - P85.</b>
- Gives the answers on the board & asks Ss
to read the text in part 6 on page 85 & work
in pairs to make the questions .
- Reading the text in part 6 on page 85 &
working in pairs to make the questions .
- Asks Ss to compare the questions.
– Asks Ss to give the questions by role
playing in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & Comments
the questions.
* Answer given:
a) Mr. Ha is a businessman. He is going to
Hanoi.
b) Miss. Hoa is a teacher. She is going to
c) Mr. Tuan & Mrs. Vui are doctors. They
are going to the hospital.
– Giving the questions by role playing in
pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation &
Commenting the questions.
* Question keys:
a) Who is this / Who are they ?
b) What is he / she doing ?
are they
c) Where is he/she going ?
are they
d) How is she / he traveling ?
are they
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Present progressive with “WH - question”
with she / he / they to talk about actions happening now
*<b>Present progressive WH- question:</b>
<b>+Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She+ V-ing?</b>
<b> We/ You/ They </b>
V.Homeworks <b>( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the grammar & the example exchange.
- Exercise: 1-P72; 2-P72; 3-P73;
- Read the text B1 – P86 at home & prepare the pictures on P86.
<b>VI. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 46+47</b>
<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>
<b>B: A TRUCK DRIVE </b>
<b>A.Objectives: :</b>
- Helps Ss to read a picture story about a truck driver. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas & get some information about the text.
I.Knowledge:
: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
-“WH - question” with she / he / they .
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
II.Checking:
<b> III.New lesson:</b>
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION
Time: 10 M.
1. Vocabulary: - Matching.
a truck driver (n); quầy bán thực phẩm
a farmer (n); người lái xe tải
a foodstall; dỡ hàng xuống
(to) load chất hàng lên
(to0 unload; đến
(to) arrive at; nông dân
- Introduces the words by explaining the
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning by matching the words to the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Ordering statements .
- Gives the un-order statements about the
text & asks Ss to work in groups to guess the
order of these statements.
- Asks Ss to compare their ordering.
- Asks Ss give their ordering.
- Comments S’s ordering.
* Statements:
1. going to Hanoi.
2. Meeting the farmer.
3. Having breakfast
4. Going to a farm
5. Loading vegetable in the truck
6. Unloading the truck
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Giving the meaning by matching & the
pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.
- Copying the words.
- Working in groups to guess the order of
these statements.
- Comparing their ordering.
- Giving their ordering.
I think I read
a c
f
II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M.
3. Presentation text: B1 – P86.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the story
about the truck driver & get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Asks Ss to check their ordering.
- Corrects comments.
4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P87.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions:
a. What does Mr. Quang do ?
b. Where is he going at 5.am ?
c. Who is waiting for him ?
d. Where is he taking vegetables ?
e. What is he doing at 7.00 ?
f. Where is he eating ?
- Reading story & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Checking the ordering.
* Answer keys:
a: 4; b: 2; c: 5; d: 1; e: 6; f:3.
- Working in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
* Answers:
a. He is a truck driver.
b. He is going to a farm.
c. A farmer is waiting for him.
d. He’s taking vegetables at the farm
e. He is eating his breakfast.
f. He’s eating at the foodstall.
III.
FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M
5. Chain game:
- Introduces the requirements & helps Ss to
play the game in the whole class by talking
about Mr. Quang routine.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
the game.
- Playing the game in the whole class by
talking about Mr. Quang routine.
-Correcting the pronunciation &
commenting the game.
* Example:
S1: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the
morning.
S2: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the
morning and he is going to a farm.
S3: …
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homework ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the main idea of the story.
- Exercise: 1-P73; 2-P74 workbook;
- Read the text C1-P89 at home & prepare the road sign.
<b>VI. Evaluation : </b>
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period:47</b>
<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>
<b>C: ROAD SIGNS. </b>
<b>A.Objectives: :</b>
- Helps Ss to practice in “CAN / CAN’T” statements & traffic vocabulary. By
the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what you are allowed & not allowed to
do on the road.
I.Knowledge:
: - “CAN / CAN’T”
<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
II.Checking:
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b> TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 10M.</b>
1 Vocabulary: Slap the board.
a policeman (n);
difficult (adj);
(to) go straight.
(to) turn left / right;
Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation & gives
example.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Noughts & Crosses:
- Introduces the name of the places &
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual & Correcting the mistakes
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
divides Ss into two groups to practice by
making questions & answers about what
people doing.
- Asks S’s to give the answer keys by
role-playing in pairs.
- Corrects & comments the game.
answers about what people doing.
- Giving the answer keys by role-playing in
pairs.
- Correcting S’s pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
S1: What is he doing ?
S2: He’s driving a car..
(drive) a car (ride) a bike (walk)
(ride) a motorbike (park) (wait for ) a bus
(turn) left (go) straight (turn) right
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 20-M . </b>
3. Presentation text: C1 – P89.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Comprehension questions:
- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects.
* Questions:
a. What does Hoan do ?
b. Is his job difficult ?. Tell me why ?
c. What does this sign mean ?
* Note: Points to the road signs & asks Ss
to explain the meaning.
2. Picture drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Reading the text in silence.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
- Working in pairs to answer the questions.
- Giving the answers & correcting.
* Answers:
a. He is a policeman.
b. Yes, it is. Because it is …….
c. You can park here.
…..
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups with teacher & in closed
pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:
<b>III.</b>
<b> FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>
3.Complete sentences: C2-P89-90.
- Introduces the requirements & the road
sign then asks Ss to add CAN or CAN’T to
the gap base on the signs .
– Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing
in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & Comments
the questions.
- Adding CAN or CAN’T to the gap base on the
signs .
– Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing in
pairs.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Answer keys:
a. can; b. can’t; c. can; d. can’t.
<b>.</b>
1. Vocabulary: - Matching.
dangerous (adj);
an accident (n);
an intersection (n);
(to) go fast (v);
(to) warn us (v);
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning by matching the words to the
meaning & Corrects the pronunciation.
2. Wordsquare:
- Introduces the wordsquare & asks Ss to
work in groups to find out the 20 words
related to the traffic.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
prediction.
- Comments S’s the game.
* Answer key:
road signs; accident; travel; us; left;
right; go fast
truck
warn; stop; turn; car; ride; go; drive;
help; straight; dangerous.
2. True / False prediction:
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Giving the meaning by matching & the
pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.
- Working in groups to find out the 20 words
related to the traffic.
- Comparing & giving their prediction.
R O A D S I G N D
W K O R X H I S A
A C C I D E N T N
R U C D R L O R G
N R A E I P T A E
S T R A V E L I R
T U S L E F T G O
O R I G H T O H U
P N G O F A S T S
- Introduces the statements & asks Ss to
work in pairs to look at the pictures on
page 90 & choose the correct statements
for each one
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
prediction.
- Comments S’s the game.
C4-P90 & choose the correct statement for each
one.
- Comparing & giving their prediction.
a. Slow down
Go straight
b. Turn left
Don’t turn left
c. Turn right
Go straight or turn left
d. Slow down
Don’t go straight
ahead
e. Park here
Don’t park here
f. Cars & trucks go
here
Motorbike go here
g. Don’t go straight
Don’t turn right or left
h. Park here
Don’t park here
<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M</b>
3. Presentation text: C3 – P90.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text &
get the details & check the prediction.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text.
- Corrects comments.
* Answer keys:
- Reading the text & getting the details &
checking the prediction
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
a. Slow down b. Turn left c. Go straight or turn left d. Don’t go straight
ahead
e. Don’t park here f. Cars & trucks go
here
g. Don’t turn right or left h. Park here
<b>III.POST- READING Time: 10 M</b>
4. Word cue drill: C4-P91.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
S1: What does this sign mean ?
S2: You must [slow down].
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M)
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the road signs.
- Prepare for the grammar practice.
………
………
………
………
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
Teaching date:………..
<b>Period 49+50+51</b>
<b>Grammar practice </b>
<b>A.Objectives: </b>
- Helps Ss to further practice in Simple present vs. Present progressive. By the end
of the lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars completely .
I.Knowledge:
: - Simple present vs. Present progressive.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
II.Checking:
<b>III.New lesson:</b>
<b>TEACHER’S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M . </b>
1. Revision:
- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Simple
present vs. Present progressive
*Form:
* Present simple: S + V-s / es + O.
* Use: Talk about things happen regularly.
* Present progressive: S + tobe + V-ing.
* Use: Talk about thing happening now.
- Corrects & comments.
- Giving the form & use of the Simple present
vs. Present progressive.
- Giving example.
* Example
- I go to school.
- I am going to school.:
<b>II.PRACTICE Time 20 M .</b>
1. Present progressive with I / She / He.
* Chain game:
- Introduces the topic & asks Ss to practice in
groups, using the past simple to talk about
their vacation.
- Asks Ss to give the answers.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Practicing in groups, using the past simple to
talk about their vacation.
- Giving the answers.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
S1: I’m watching TV.
2. Present progressive with all persons
* Complete the sentences: GP 2 – P92.
- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Asks Ss to give the keys by repeating in
chorus. Then corrects S’s pronunciation.
* Cues:
a. Minh….his bike. ( ride )
b. They ……for a bus. ( wait )
c. She ……TV. (watch )
d. We ……soccer. ( play )
e. He ……to music. ( listen )
f. They ……to school. ( walk )
g. He …… to Hanoi. ( travel )
games.
S3: She is watching TV, he is playing video
games & I’m …etc.
-Working in pairs to use the verbs in the
- Comparing the keys & give the keys.
- Correcting the keys.
* Answer keys:
a. Minh is riding his bike.
b. They are waiting for a bus.
c. She is watching TV.
d. We are playing soccer.
e. He is listening to music.
f. They are walking to school.
g. He is traveling to Hanoi.
<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M.</b>
3. Present simple vs. Present progressive:
* Contrast: GP 5 – P94.
- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive & in simple present.
* Example:
- (play) They play volleyball everyday.
They’re playing volleyball now.
- Asks Ss to give the keys
- Corrects & comments.
a. (ride)
b. (go)
c. (walk)
d. (drive)
She …her bike to school.
She …her bike now.
We …to school by bus everyday.
We …to school by bus now.
I …to school everyday.
I …to school now.
He … his truck.
He … his truck at the moment.
-Working in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive & in simple present.
- Comparing the keys & give the keys.
- Correcting the keys.
* Answer keys:
a. She rides her bike to school.
She is riding her bike now.
b. We go to school by bus everyday.
We’re going to school by bus now.
c. I walk to school everyday.
I’m walking to school now.
d. He drives his truck.
He’s driving his truck at the moment
1. Present simple tense.
-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.
-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way
to use them.
Structure:
Khẳng định: S + (to) be +(a/an) + O.
Phủ định: S + (to) be-not +(a/an) + O.
Nghi vấn:(to) be + S +a/an + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + (to)be
No, S + (to) be-not
<i>b.Example:</i>
1.They are students.
2.He isnot an engineer.
3. Are they students ?
Yes, they are.
No, they aren’t
T controls and corrects.
Notes:
I + am = I’m
She,He,It + is = she’s; he’s; it’s
You, They, We + are = you’re; they’re; we’re.
2.Exercise:
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.
a.Điền am, is, are vào ô trống.(10ms)
1. He...a nurse.
2.They ...doctors.
3.Peter...a student.
4.I...small but my
father...big.
5.Miss Mai...always early.
6. We... teachers and
they ...workers.
b. Change 6 sentences into negative
sentenses.(10ms)
Example:
1. He isn’t a nurse.
2.They are not doctors.
3.Peter is not a student.
...etc.
- Introduces the way to practice & devides the
class into 2 groups to practice.
- Helps Ss to practice.
-Calls ss to go to the board to write the
answer.
-Ss remember and answer the question
of teacher.
-Ss give examples.
+ He is a teacher.
+ Nam isnot a student.
+ Is she tall?
Yes, she is/ No, she isn’t.
...etc
- Ss take notes.
- Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.
Practicing in groups.
-Expected:
1. He is a nurse.
2.They are doctors.
3.Peter is a student.
4.I am small but my father is big.
5.Miss Mai is always early.
6. We are teachers and they are
workers.
-Ss go to the board write the answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.
Practicing in groups.
-Ss go to the board write the answer
Example:
- Corrects & comments
<b>1.Present simple tense.</b>
a. With regular verbs.:(20ms)
-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.
-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way
to use them.
Structure:
Khẳng định: S + V(s/es) + O.
Phủ định: S + don’t/doesn’t + V(inf) + O.
Nghi vấn: Do/ Does + S + V(inf) + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + do/does
No, S + don’t/ doesn’t.
-T asks ss to give more example
<i>b.Example:</i>
1.They play chess.
2.He works in a hospital.
3. Does nam like oranges?
Yes, he does
No, he doesn’t.
T controls and corrects.
Notes:
She,He,It + V(s/es)
You, They, We + V(inf)
<b>2.Exercise: </b>
a.Put the following verbs in simple presnt.
(20ms)
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.
1. The swimming bath...(open) at
9:00 and ...(close) at 18:30 every day.
2.I have a car but I...(not-use) it very
3.I...(play) the piano, but
I...(not-play) very well.
4.I don’t understand the word”decide”.
What...(“decide”/ mean)?
5.I ...(work) in a bank.
Nam...(work) in an office
-Ss remember and answer the question of
teacher.
-Ss give examples.
+ He teaches in a school..
+ Nam doesn’t play volleyball..
+ Do you want to learn English?
Yes, I do/ No,I don’t.
...etc
- Ss take notes.
- Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.
Practicing in groups.
-Expected:
1. opens...closes
2.don’t use
3.play...don’t play.
4.does the “decide” mean?
5.work...doesn’t work...
-Ss go to the board write the answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.
keys.
IV. Consolidation.(1ms)
-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
V.Homework.(1ms)
-Preparing the simple present tense .
<b>VI. Evaluation : </b>
………
………
The first term examination
Time: 45minutes
<b>Period: 52</b>
<i>.</i>Pre date:…………
<b>Period: 53+54</b>
<b>Check & Review </b>
<b>A.Objectives: </b>
- Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the grammar to prepare for the first
final semester test.
I.Knowledge:
: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>III. New lesson
<b>TEACHER’S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Gaps fill: 1 / P 40.
-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual to fill in the gaps.
-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.
-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play
in two groups by choosing the cue &
making question.
-Corrects & comments the game.
- Working in individual to fill in the gaps.
-Comparing in pairs & giving the information.
*Answer keys:
1./ am – am – are – is – are.
2./ am – is – is – are – are.
3./ a) are – am; b) is – is.
c) is – isn’t ; d) are – aren’t.
2. Noughts & Crosses:
- Playing in two groups.
They/teachers We/students She/a nurse
He/an engineer I/a student They/sister
You / 12 We/brothers She/a doctor
3. Present progressive :
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.
- Introduces the model exchange & helps
Ss to practice in groups & in individual.
- Reading the text in silence.
- Practicing in groups & in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Model sentence:
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.
- Introduces the form & use of the
grammar.
* Present progressive :
+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.
We/ You/ They
+ Use: Talk about things happening
now..
He/ She ’s [ is] riding a bike.
driving.
We/ you/ ‘re (are) playing they.
III.PRODUCTION Time: 15 M.
4. Yes / No question Answer drill:
A6-P55.
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.
3. Find someone who:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in groups using the example
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
- Comments S’s information.
* Example exchange: (Picture on P36)
S1: Do you / they play volleyball ?
S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.
S1: Does she / he play soccer ?
S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he doesn’t
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
- Working in groups using the example
exchange to ask & answer about the place
where they live & fill the name into the table.
- Comparing & reporting the information.
* Example exchange:
S1: Do you live in town ?
S2: No, I don’t. / Yes, I do.
S1: What your name ?
S2: My name is…
S1: How do you spell it ?
Find someone who lives… Name
… in town
…in the country
… near a lake
…next to a market
…opposite a paddy field
…near a post office
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
a.Structure:(10ms)
structure,use.
-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.
-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to
use them.
Form:
Khẳng định: S + (to) be +V-ing + O.
Phủ định: S + (to)be-not + V-ing+ O.
Nghi vấn: (to) Be + S + V-ing + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + (to)be
No, S + (to)be-not
Use: Diển tả một hành động đang xy ra ti
thi im núi.
*Thờng dùng với các trạng tõ nh:
Now, right now, at the moment, at present.
-T asks ss to give more example
<i>b.Example:</i>
1.They are playing chess now.
2.He is working in a hospital now.
3. Is Nam doing his homework?
Yes, he is
No, he isn’t
T controls and corrects.
Notes:
I+ am + V-ing
She,He,It + is + v-ing
You, They, We + are + v-ing
<b>2.Exercise: </b>
a.Put the following verbs in present
progressive tense.(20ms)
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.
1. The swimming bath...(open) now
2.They...(play) the piano now
3.Lan...( not-work) in a bank at
the moment
4. Nam...(work) in an office at
present.
5.Look! It...(snow).
b. Use the verbs given in present progressive
tense to complete the following sentences.
(12ms)
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.
- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.
read rain beco
me Shine get listen
1.The cost of living...higher.
2.George now can speak French fluently. His
French...better.
-Ss remember and answer the question
of teacher.
-Ss give examples.
+ He is teaching in a school at the
moment.
+ Nam isn’t playing volleyball at
present...
+ Are you studying now?
Yes, I am/ No, I am not.
...etc
- Ss take notes.
- Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.
Practicing in groups.
-Expected:
1. is opening
2.are playing
3.isn’t working
4.is working
5.is snowing
-Ss go to the board write the answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.
Practicing in groups.
-Ss go to the board write the answer
3.Keep silent, please. I...to the
teacher.
4.We can go out because it...
5.Where’s your father? – He...a
newspaper in his room.
6.It’s very hot today. The
sun...above.
5. is reading
6. is shining
- Correcting the answer keys.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>
-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
<b>V.Homework</b>.(1ms)
-Preparing the present progressive tense
VI. Evaluation:
...
...
...
Pre date:…………..
Teaching date:………..
Period: 55+56+57
<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>a. parts of the body</b>
<b>A.Objectives: </b>
- Helps Ss to practice in nouns to talk about the parts of the body. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the parts of their body.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>Asks Ss some questions about the function of their parts of the body.
<i><b>? What does your head/ hands/ legs/ … for ?</b></i>
<b>-</b> Corrects S’s answers & comments.
<b> III. New lesson :</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>
<i><b> his head / chest;</b></i>
<i><b> his shoulders/ arms / hands</b></i>
<i><b> legs/ feet / fingers / toes. </b></i>
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
- Listening to the words.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Rub out and Remember:</b>
- Introduces the words & helps Ss to read to
remember.
- Erasers the words in un-order & asks Ss to
read.
- Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the circle
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
<b>- Reading the words to remember.</b>
<b>- Correcting the pronunciation & the</b>
mistakes.
<i><b>his head his chest; his toes.</b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>
<i><b>his shoulders his arms his hands</b></i>
<i><b> his legs his feet his fingers </b></i>
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>3. Picture drill: A1 - P 96.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
<i> S1: What is that ?</i>
<i>S2: That is his head.</i>
<i>S1: What are those ?</i>
<i>S2: Those are his shoulders<b>.</b></i>
<b>III.</b>
<b> FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>
<b>3. Wordsquare:</b>
- Introduces the word-square & asks Ss to
work in groups to find out the 14 hidden
words.
– Asks Ss to give the words in two groups
by circling the words & put them into a
present progressive statement & write on the
board.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
* Answer keys:
HEAD; FINGER;SHOULDER
- Working in groups to find out the hidden
- Giving the words in two groups by circling
the words & put them into a present
progressive statement & write on the board.
<b>H</b> <b>E</b> <b>A D O X W T</b>
<b>A</b> <b>K</b> <b>L A C T</b> <b>F</b> <b>E</b>
<b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>A V H A</b> <b>O W</b>
<b>F</b> <b>I</b> <b>N G E R</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b>
HANDS; FOOT.
ARMS; LEGS; CHEST; TOES
<b>Q</b> <b>E</b> <b>M A T</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b>
<b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>R H A N</b> <b>D</b> <b>S</b>
<b>S</b> <b>H</b> <b>O U L D</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>
tall short (adj);
fat thin (adj);
heavy light (adj).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Noughts & Crosses:</b>
- Introduces the cues & divides the class
into two groups to play the game.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
<b>- Playing the game.</b>
- Corrects & Comments the game.
<b>tall</b> <b>big</b> <b>Fat</b>
<b>small</b> <b>thin</b> <b>Short</b>
<b>quiet</b> <b>light</b> <b>heavy</b>
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>3. True / False repetition drill: A4 –P98.</b>
- Reads the cues & asks Ss to repeat in
chorus if the cue is true & keep silent if
the cue is false.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>* Teacher:</b>
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating if the cue is true & keep silent if
- Correcting the pronunciation
<b>* Student:</b>
<i><b>P. a:</b></i>
<i><b>P. b:</b></i>
<i><b>P. c:</b></i>
<i><b>P. d:</b></i>
She’s thin
<i><b>He’s thin</b></i>
<i><b>He’s </b></i>
<i><b>small</b></i>
<i><b>She’s </b></i>
<i><b>thin</b></i>
<i><b>She’s tall</b></i>
<i><b>He’s </b></i>
<i><b>short</b></i>
<i><b>He’s tall</b></i>
<i><b>She’s tall</b></i>
<i><b>He’s fat</b></i>
<i><b>He’s </b></i>
<i><b>heavy</b></i>
<i><b>She’s </b></i>
<i><b>short</b></i>
<i><b>She’s </b></i>
<i><b>fat</b></i>
<i><b>Repea</b></i>
<i><b>t</b></i>
<i><b>Silent</b></i>
<i><b>Silent</b></i>
<b>3. Prediction: A4 – P98.</b>
- Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to
work in individual to predict the
adjectives to fill in.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
prediction .
- Helps Ss to listen to the tape & check
their prediction.
- Corrects & Comments S’s prediction.
<b>4. Grid: With answer keys.</b>
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
listen to the tape & write the order of the
people described.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
information.
- Corrects & Comments S’s information.
- Working in individual to predict the
adjectives to fill in.
- Comparing & give their prediction.
<b>* Answer:</b>
<i><b>Pa. Thin / light; Pb. Fat / heavy.</b></i>
<i><b>Pc. Tall / heavy; Pd. Short / fat.</b></i>
- Listening to the tape & writing the order of
the people described.
- Comparing & giving their information.
<i><b>Tall ? short ? thin ? fat ?</b></i> <i><b>Listen</b></i>
<i><b>Picture a</b></i> <i><b>( thin - tall )</b></i> <i><b>4</b></i>
<i><b>Picture b</b></i> <i><b>( short – fat )</b></i> <i><b>3</b></i>
<i><b>Picture c</b></i> <i><b>( tall – fat )</b></i> <i><b>2</b></i>
<i><b>Picture d</b></i> <i><b>( short – fat )</b></i> <i><b>1</b></i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.
- Exercise: A3 & 4- P84. Workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on P100.
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:
Teaching date:
Period:58+59
<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>B: faces</b>
<b>A.Objectives: </b>
- Helps Ss to practice in face vocabulary ( nouns & adjectives )to describe people’s
faces. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe their faces.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> Pelmanism.</b>
<b>-</b> Introduces the words & asks Ss to choose the pairs of antonym adjectives.
<i><b>FAT </b></i> <i><b>TALL </b></i> <i><b>HEAVY </b></i> <i><b>BIG</b></i> <i><b>NOISY</b></i>
<i><b>THIN</b></i> <i><b>SHORT</b></i> <i><b>LIGHT</b></i> <i><b>SMALL</b></i> <i><b>QUIET</b></i>
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: ROR.</b>
his eyes/ ears/ lips/ teeth
his hair/ nose/ mouth.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Slap the board.</b>
- Introduces the picture of the people’s face &
divides the class into two groups to play the
game.
- Corrects & Comments the game.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
<b>- Playing the game.</b>
- Commenting the game.
<i> His eyes his hair</i>
<i><b>His nose </b></i>
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
<b>3. Presentation text: B1 – 100.</b>
- Introduces the six pictures on page 100 (a – f)
& helps Ss to practice.
- Checks S’s practicing in individual.
- introduces the model sentence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Practicing in individual.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>Model sentences:</b>
<i><b>a round face - an oval face</b></i>
<i><b>full lips - thin lips</b></i>
<i><b>long hair - short hair</b></i>
<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>4. Word square.</b>
- Introduces the wordsquare & divides the
class into two groups & asks them to find out
the 17 hidden words in the square.
- Asks Ss to give the words.
- Corrects & comments.
* Answer key:
<i> hair; fat; see; the; mouth; out; heavy.</i>
<i> ear; arm; near; toe; to; feet; </i>
<i> teeth; fingers.</i>
<i> nose; eye.</i>
- Finding out the 17 hidden words in the
square.
<b>- Giving the words.</b>
<b>H A</b> <b>I</b> <b>R</b> <b>X P</b>
<b>N</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>A</b> <b>T I</b>
<b>E</b> <b>O</b> <b>Y</b> <b>F</b> <b>E N</b>
<b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>E G</b>
<b>R</b> <b>T</b> <b>H</b> <b>E</b> <b>T E</b>
<b>M O</b> <b>U</b> <b>T</b> <b>H R</b>
<b>H E</b> <b>A</b> <b>V</b> <b>Y S</b>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: ROR. B2.P101.</b>
black; gray; red; blue;
brown; white; yellow; green
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Finding friends:</b>
- Introduces the requirements & the table then
asks Ss to make sentences:
<i><b>She has brown hair.</b></i>
<i><b>She has green eyes. Etc…</b></i>
- Asks Ss to go to the board & take note their
friends appearances & Comments .
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Making sentences:
<i><b>She has brown hair.</b></i>
<i><b>She has green eyes. Etc…</b></i>
- Going to the board & taking note their
friends appearances.
She/ has… <i><b>eyes</b></i> <i><b>hair</b></i> <i><b>lips</b></i> <i><b>teeth</b></i>
<i><b>gray </b></i>
<i><b>blue </b></i>
<i><b>White</b></i>
<i><b>Brown</b></i>
<i><b>red </b></i>
<i><b>green.</b></i>
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
<b>3. Dialogue build: B3 – 101.</b>
- Read the dialogue & presents the symbols for
the words & asks Ss to repeat to remember the
dialogue.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups &
in pairs.
- Asks Ss to build the dialogue.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Repeating the dialogue to remember.
- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in
pairs.
- Building the dialogue.
- Correcting the pronunciation & building
the dialogue.
* Dialogue:
<i>Hoa: I have a new doll.</i>
<i>Mai: What color is her hair ?</i>
<i>Hoa: It’s black.</i>
<i>Mai: What color are her eyes ?</i>
<i>Hoa: They are brown.</i>
<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>2. Picture drill: B3/ P 101.</b>
- Introduces the example exchange & the
pictures then helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>* Note:</i> Using pictures of the four dolls on page
101.
<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: What color is her hair ?</i>
<i>S2: It’s black.</i>
<i>S1: What color are her eyes ?</i>
<i> S2: They are brown<b>.</b></i>
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary: ROR.</b>
<i><b> </b></i>round – a round face;
oval – an oval face
full/ thin – full/ thin lips;
long/ short – long/ short hair<i><b>.</b></i>
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Prediction: B4 – P 101.</b>
- Introduces the close text & asks Ss to work
in pairs to predict the information to fill in
the gap.
- Asks Ss to give their information.
- Comments the information.
* Answer key:
<i>* Miss Chi is tall and thin. She has a round</i>
<i>face, long black hair, brown eyes, a small</i>
<i>nose, thin lips and small white teeth.</i>
- Working in pairs to predict the information
& filling in the gap.
- Giving the information.
- Commenting the information.
<i>* Miss Chi is ___ and thin. She has a ___</i>
<i>face, ___ ___ hair, ___ eyes, a ___ nose, ___</i>
<i>lips and small ___ teeth.</i>
<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M</b>
<b>3. Presentation text: B4 - P101.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts
about Miss. Chi & correct their prediction.
- Asks Ss to compare their information.
- Corrects comments.
<b>4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P76.</b>
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to ask & answer the
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
<i>*</i> Questions:
<i>a. Is Miss. Chi’s hair long or short ?</i>
<i>b. What color are her eyes ?</i>
<i>c. Are her lips full or thin ?</i>
<i>d. What color is her hair ?</i>
-Reading the texts about Miss. Chi &
correcting their prediction.
- Comparing their information.
- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.
- Correcting the answer keys & Commenting.
<i>* </i> Answer keys:
<i>A. Chi’s hair is long.</i>
<i> B. Her eyes are brown. </i>
<i>C. They are full.</i>
<i>D. Her hair is black.</i>
<i>E. Her nose is small.</i>
III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
<b>5. Survey:</b>
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to asks & answer something
about themselves & take note into the table.
- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.
- Working in pairs to asks & answer
something about themselves & take note into
the table.
- Giving their information.
My partner My Mum My Dad My Brother My Sister
<i>Body</i> <i>Thin</i>
<i>Face</i> <i>Round</i>
<i>Hair</i> <i>Short - black</i>
<i>Eyes</i> <i><sub>Etc</sub><sub>…</sub></i>
<i>Nose</i>
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M)</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts.
- Exercise: write a short paragraph to describe people using the survey.
- Prepare the pictures on page 104 & 106.
<b>VI.Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
Pre date:……….
Teaching date:……….
Period: 60 +61
- Helps Ss to practice in talking about how we feel using adjectives of Physical state.
By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how we feel.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision ( 5 M ) : Picture cues.</b>
- Asks Ss to work in pairs, take it in turn to point at the different picture on page
S2: It’s green.
- Corrects & comments.
<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M.
1.Vocabulary:
<i> </i>hungry (adj); thirsty (adj);
full (adj); tired (adj);
hot (adj); cold (adj);
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
- Presents the words & the meaning into two
column then asks Ss to work in individual to
match the word to its meaning.
- Corrects & comments.
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to match.
hungry (adj);
thirsty (adj);
full (adj);
l ạnh
nóng
tired (adj);
<i> hot (adj); </i>
cold (adj);
<i>khát</i>
<i>mệt</i>
<i>no</i>
II.PRACTICE Time: 20 M.
3. Word cue drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Picture drill: A1-P104 + A5-P106
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Matching:
- Introduces the requirements & asks Ss to
listen to the tape & match the right name
with the pictures on page 106.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their matching.
- Helps SS to correct & comments.
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: How do you feel ?</i>
<i>S2: I’m [ hungry].</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
HUNGRY THIRSTY HOT
COLD TIRED FULL
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: How does he/she feel ?</i>
<i>S2: He/she is [ hungry].</i>
<i>S1: How do they feel ?</i>
<i>S2: They are [ hungry].</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
- Listening to the tape & matching the right
name with the pictures on page 106.
- Comparing & giving their matching.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 5 M
4. Guessing game:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
write their physical state on a piece of paper
then ask the other to guess.
- Helps Ss to play the game.
-Corrects & comments.
- Writing their physical state on a piece of
paper then ask the other to guess.
- Playing the game.
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: Are you thirsty ?</i>
<i>S2: No, I’m not.</i>
<i> S1: Are you hot ?…</i>
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
<i> Some Orange Juice = A Drink (N); </i>
<i> Some Noodle (N); (To) Like .</i>
<i> (To) Want = Would Like; </i>
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Predict Dialogue:
- Introduces the open dialogue & asks Ss to
work in pairs to predict the suitable words to
fill in the gaps to complete the dialogue.
- Asks Ss to give their prediction.
- Comments their prediction.
- Repeating The Words In Chorus & In
Individual.
- Correcting The Mistakes.
- Giving The Meaning & The Pronunciation.
- Copying The Words.
- Working In Pairs To Predict The Suitable
Words To Fill In The Gaps To Complete The
Dialogue.
- Giving Their Prediction.
* Open Dialogue:
<i>Nam: How Do You Feel ?</i>
<i>Lan: I’m ………And………</i>
<i>Nam: What would you like ?</i>
<i>Lan: I’d like some……… What about you ?</i>
<i>Nam: I’m…… I’d like some………</i>
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M
3. Presentation dialogue. A3-P105.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the dialogue
between Nam & Lan & get the details.
- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects comments.
4. Matching:
- Introduces the poster & asks Ss to read the
dialogue again & match the key words to the
people.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
- Reading the dialogue.
- Checking their prediction.
- Working in pairs to read the dialogue again
& matching the key words to the people.
- Comparing & giving the keys.
- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
<i>Hot</i>
<i>Tired</i>
<i>Thirsty</i>
<i>Full</i>
<i>Hungry</i>
<i>Noodles</i>
<i>A drink</i>
<i>To sit down</i>
<i>Lan</i>
<i>hot</i>
III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
5. Mapped dialogue:
- Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to read
to remember.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Asks Ss to complete the dialogue.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Reading the dialogue to remember.
- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs.
- Completing the dialogue.
<i>…fell ?</i>
<i>…like ?</i>
<i>…thirsty</i>
<i>… orange juice.</i>
<i>…cold + hungry</i>
<i>…some noodles…fell ?</i>
<i>…like ?</i>
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: How do you fell ?</i>
<i>S2: I’m cold and hungry.</i>
<i>S1: What would you like ?</i>
<i>S2: I’d like some noodles. How do you fell ?</i>
<i>S!: I’m thirsty.</i>
<i>S2: What would you like ?</i>
<i>S1: I’d like some orange juice.</i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & give the form of the polite
offers & requests with “What would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”.
<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ) : </b>
- Study the vocabulary & the dialogue.
- Exercise: 2-P87- workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 110 & the menu.
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
Teaching date:………
Period: 62+63+64
- Helps Ss to practice in Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative & Yes /
No questions to talk about food & drink . By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use
these grammars to talk about food & drink correctly.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.
<i><b> </b></i>Some / Any with There is / There are,
Positive, Negative & Yes / No questions
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>Networks.
- Introduces the requirement & asks
Ss to give the food & drink that
they usually have.
- Comments.
<i><b>food</b></i>
<i><b>rice meat</b></i>
<i><b>Drink</b></i>
<i><b>Milk a drink</b></i>
<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
an apple (n); an orange (n);
a banana (n); some water (n).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Dictation list:
- Presents the words & the table then asks Ss
to listen & put the words into the correct
column.
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their list.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
* Teacher reads:
An apple; An orange Rice; Water Milk
Vegetables Meat; Noodle; Bread Banana
<i>Hot drink; Cold drink</i>
3. Presentation dialogue: B2-P109
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the model sentence.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
- Listening to the words<i>. </i>
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to list.
A AN SOME
<i>Banana</i>
<i>Hot drink</i>
<i>Cold drink</i>
<i>An apple</i>
An orange
<i>Rice</i>
<i>Water</i>
<i>Milk</i>
<i>Vegetables</i>
<i>Meat;</i>
<i>Noodle</i>
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
& in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Comprehension:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
tick what for lunch on the list.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the key.
- Corrects & comments.
<i>(+) There is some rice</i>
<i>(?) Is there any rice ?</i>
<i>(-) There isn’t any rice.</i>
<i>(+) There are some rice</i>
<i>(?) Are there any rice ?</i>
<i>(-) There aren’t any rice.</i>
- Ticking what for lunch on the list.
- Comparing & giving the key.
Meat
Rice
noodles
Fruit
Water
Milk
II.PRACTICE Time 15 M
5. Picture drill: B1-P108
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Example exchange:
<i>S1: Is there any… ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, there is some…</i>
<i> No, there isn’t any…</i>
<i>S1: Are there any… ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, there are some…</i>
<i> No, there aren’t any…</i>
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
<i> </i>some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice
fruit/ milk/ vegetable
(a vegetable).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching / Grid:
- Presents the tape & the table then asks Ss
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
with what they would like.
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their
matching.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
2. Presentation dialogue: B4-P110.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the model sentence.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
a b c d e f g h
Nhan x x
Tuan x x
Huong x x
Mai x x
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
- I’d like some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice
fruit/ milk/ vegetable
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.
3. Picture drill: B4-P110 & B5-P111.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Example exchange:
<i>S1: What would you like ?</i>
<i>S2: I’d like some [ fish ]</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 10 M
4. Chain game:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
talk about what they would like in turn.
- Helps Ss to play the game.
-Corrects & comments.
- Talking about what they would like in turn.
- Playing the game.
* Example:
<i>S1: I’d like some fish.</i>
<i>S2: I’d like some fish & some vegetable.</i>
S3: I’d like some fish & some vegetables &
some orange juice.
S4:…
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
my favorite food/ drink;
some carrots/ beans/
peas/ iced tea.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
- Listening to the words.
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Picture drill: B1-P108
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
3. ROR dialogue: C2-P112.
- Introduces the dialogue by giving the
symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen
to the dialogue.
- Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to
remember.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Introduces the model sentence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
* Example exchange:
<i> S1: What are these ?</i>
<i> S2: They are beans. What are those?</i>
<i> S1: They are carrots.</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
<i>S1: Do you like vegetables ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.</i>
<i>S1: Would you like some vegetables ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, I would. / Yes, please.</i>
<i> No, I wouldn’t. / No, thank you</i>
II.PRACTICE Time 15 M
4. Word cue drill:
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>beans</i> <i>peas</i> <i>carrots</i> <i>milk</i>
<i>iced tea</i> <i>oranges</i> <i>rice</i> <i>apple</i>
Example exchange:
<i> S1: Do you like [ beans ] ?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do. / [No, I don’t ].</i>
<i> S1: Would you like some [ beans ] now ?</i>
<i> S2: No, thank you./ Yes, please.</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M.
5. Survey:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to interview each other about
their favorite food & drink using the given
question & take note the information into the
table.
- Asks Ss to report the information about
their friends using the model.
- Corrects & comments.
- Reporting the information about their
friends.
<i>* </i>Question:<i> Do you like chicken ?</i>
<i>* </i>Feedback:<i> Nam likes chicken & orange but</i>
<i>he doesn’t like fish…</i>
<i>Name</i> Likes… <i>Doesn’t like…</i>
<i>Nam</i> <i>Chicken & orange</i> <i>Fish</i>
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):
- Asks Ss to contrast “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):
- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 4-5 92. Workbook.
- Prepare the picture on page 114 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:…….
Teaching date:……
Period:65+66+67
<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 1: AT THE STORE</b>
<b>A.Objectives: </b>
- Helps Ss to practice in quantifiers ( a kilo of…) & containers ( a bottle of…) to
talk about people buy at the store. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
quantifiers & containers.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense. Quantifiers & Containers.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
some eggs/ chocolates;
some oil/ beef/ soap/
toothpaste.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
- Introduces the phrases & the pictures then
asks Ss to work in individual to match the
picture to the correct word .
- Asks Ss to compare their matching &
match.
- Corrects & comments.
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to match the picture
to the correct word .
<i>grams of</i>
<i>a kilo of</i>
<i>a can of</i>
<i>a bar of</i>
<i>a box of</i>
<i>a tube of</i>
<i>a packet of</i>
<i>a dozen</i>
II.PRACTICE Time 25 M
3. ROR dialogue: A1a-P114.
- Introduces the dialogue by giving the
symbols for the words & Helps Ss tolisten to
the dialogue.
- Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to
remember.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Introduces the model sentence.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Picture drill: A1b-P115.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Substitution drill:
- Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to
read the model then reads the substituted
words & asks Ss to read the substitution
sentence.
- Asks Ss to practice in individual.
- Corrects the pronunciation & comments.
* Teacher reads<i>:</i>
<i> water; oil; soap; peas; beans; coke;</i>
<i>chocolates; eggs; tea; noodles</i>
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:
<i>S1: Can I help you ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please.</i>
<i>S1: Here you are.</i>
<i>S2: Thank you.</i>
* Example exchange:
<i>S1: Can I help you ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please.</i>
<i>S1: Here you are.</i>
<i> S2: Thank you.</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
- Reading the model & the substituted words
- Reading the substitution sentence.
- Practicing in individual.
- Correcting the pronunciation & the
substitution.
* Ss repeat:
I’d like a bottle of water, please.
I’d like a bar of soap, please<i>.</i>
<b>Teacher's works</b> <b>Students'works</b>
<b>I.Presentation.(10ms)</b>
A2 P.116
From the dialogue, T sets a sence to give the
model sentences.
1)I need/ want some <i><b>beef.</b></i>
How <i><b>much</b></i> do you need/ want?
2)I need/ want some <i><b>eggs.</b></i>
How <i><b>many</b></i> do you need/ want?
<b>II.Practice.(20ms)</b>
"Blackboard drill"
T shows the way to ask ss practice well.
Example exchanges:
S1:I need some beef.
S2:How much do you want?
S1:Three hundred grams, please.
...etc.
-T controls and corrects.
<b>III.Production (10ms)</b>
"Role play"
T asks each ss writes a shopping list. In pair, ss
take it in turns to be the storekeeper and the
customer.
Storekeeper Customer
Can I help you? I want/ need....
How much/
many...? I'd like....
Anything else? Do you have
any...
That's....dong,
please. ...please...Thank you !
-T corrects.
-Ss read the dialogue and answer the
questions of the teacher.
-Ss give the concept check.
-Ss read the key words and practice
well.
-Ss practice in pair.
-Take notes.
-Ss work in role to practice well.
-Take notes.
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M.
1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid)
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys
& Comments
- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
Yes No
…big ? √
…small ? √
…a yard ? √
…a well ? √
<i><b>Shopping list</b></i>
…flowers ? √
… trees ? √
II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 10 M:
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & get the details.
- Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check
the prediction & Corrects.
- Listening to the dialogue & getting the
details.
- Listening to the dialogue & checking the
prediction.
III.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.
3. Vocabulary: Slap the Board.
a garden (n);
a vegetable (n);
a photo (n).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
4.True / False statement prediction:
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys &
Comments..
* Answer keys:
1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T;
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
* Statements:
1. The house is in the country.
2. There is a river near the house.
3. There’re trees to the left of the house.
4. There’re two gardens.
IV.WHILE-READING Time: 10 M
5. Presentation text: A2-P73.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter &
get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.
6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the
- Reading the letter & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Working in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
house ?
b. Is the house beautiful ?
c. Is there a flowers garden behind the
house?
d. Is there a lake to the right of the house?
e. Is Nga in the city ?
B. No, it isn’t.
C. No, she isn’t.
D. Yes, there is..
E. No, there isn’t.
Answer:
a –D; b – A; c – E; d – E; e – C.
V.POST-LISTENING & READING
Time:5 M
7. Transformation writing:
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual to change the underlined
information to describe their own house &
then draw a picture of it as a photo .
- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.
- Writing in individual & giving the
information.
* My house:
There’s a flowers garden in front of the
house. There’s a vegetable garden behind the
house. To the left of the house, there’s a lake.
To the right of the house, there are tall trees.
Here is a photo.
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):
- Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare the picture on page 74.
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:68+69
<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>B:</b> <b>AT THE CANTEEN</b>
<b>A.Objectives: </b>
- Helps students will be able to practice in Offers and Requests for Food and
Drink.
I.Knowledge:
- The present simple tense.<i> “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”.</i>
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
II- Revision
III. New lesson :
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>I.Practice.</b>
<b>1.Kim's game</b>.(10m)
B1 P.119.
T asks Ss play it in team to taking it in turns to
fill up the lists on the board.
- Asks Ss to give their information & comments.
There's a.. There's
some.... There are some....
-can of
soda
-rice - vegetables
.... -milk -apples
...etc ...etc. ...etc.
-T corrects.
<b>2.Matching</b>.(10M)
B4 P.120. T shows the way to ask ss to play.
- Asks Ss to give their information & comments.
a b c d e f g h i j k l
2 4 1 5 7 3 6 8
-T corrects.
3<b>.Word cue drill.(10m)</b>
T shows the way to ask ss to practice well.
- Asks Ss to give their information & comments.
bread/ milk fish/ soda
noodles/ water chicken/ iced tea
rice/ orange
juice beef/ vegetables/lemonade
Example exchanges: B2 P.120
S1:What would you like for breakfast?
S2:I'd like some bread and some milk.
...etc.
T controls and corrects.
<b>II.Production.(10m)</b>
- Asks Ss to give their information & comments.
1.Chain game
S1: I'd like some fish.
S2: I'd like some fish and some rice.
S3: I'd like some fish and some rice and a coke.
S4:...etc.
-Ss enjoy the game.
-Ss play it in team to taking it in turns to
fill up the lists on the board.
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
-Ss read the word cues and practice
well.
-Ss work in groups.
- Working in groups to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
<b>I.Presentaetion.(10ms)</b>
<b>1.Pre-teach.</b>
T elicits to teach vocab.
-Fifty =50
-a hundred ( two hundred....) =100 ( 200)
-a thousand ( two thousand....) = 1.000 ( 2.000)
-Seven thousand five hundred = 7.5000.
2.Checking vocab.
-Slap the board.
100 200 5.000
250 6.200
<b>II.Practice.(25m)</b>
<b>1.Blackboard drill.</b>
T shows the way to practice.
100 50 200
150 350 750
1.000 2.000 5.000 4.200
7.500 9.500 2.300 10.000
2.Noughts and crosses.
2.500
dong 500 dong 3.000 dong
4.800
dong 10.000 dong 1.000 dong
1.200
dong 8.500 dong 5.000 dong
<b>Example exchange:</b>
S1: How much is it?
S2: It's two thousand five hundred dong.
<b>*Pre-teach</b>.P. 121
-a cake ( n) picture
-a sandwich : (n) picture
-a fried rice (n) axplaination
-an iced cream (n) explaination.
-a bowl of (n) picture.
- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning
& the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
*<b>Picture drill</b>. B5-6 P.121
Ex: S1: How much is a fried rice?
S2: It's two thousand five hundred dong.
...etc.
<b>III.Production." survey"(5m)</b>
T asks ss to fill the survey according to Real price they
know, not the price in the texbook.
How
much a fried a bowl an eraser a ruler a school Tieng Anh 6
-Guess the words- listen and repeat.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
-Ss enjoy the game.
-Listen- understand and practice
well.
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
-Look at the picture and practice
well.
is it ? rice of bag
... .... ... ... ... 11.200 dong
-T controls and corrects.
price they know, not the price in the
texbook.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework</b>.(2m)
-Doing exercise : B3-4 in the workbook.
-Preparing: Unit 11:Grammar practice
<b>VI.Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:……..
Period: 70
- Helps students will be able to further practice in Likes and Dislikes ,
Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies.
I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>I.Likes and Dislikes.(20ms)</b>
1.Find someone who.
T shows the way to ask ss to practice.
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Find someone who... Name
....likes fish Lan
....doesn't like chicken ...
-Listen and practice. - Working in
pairs to match the questions to the
answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
Epected:
S1: Do you like fish?
S2: yes, I do.
....likes bread ....
....doesn't like rice ....
....likes milk ...
....doesn't like soda ...
...Doaesn't like vegetables. ...
2.Write it up.
Grammar practice 2 P.122 with "a" "an"
"some"
- Gives the content of the exercise &
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
a: a sandwich, a banana...
an: an orange, an ice cream....
some: some noodles, some fish....
-T corrects.
3.Guessing game.
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Example:
<i><b>I'd like some milk.</b></i>
S1: Would you like a sandwich?
S2: No, I wouldn't.
S1: Would you like some milk?
...etc.
<b>II Adjectives.(20ms)</b>
1.Grammar practice 3 P.123.
"Pelmanism"
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
T shows the way to practice.
tall long hot fat heavy weak
short short cold thin lihgt strong
2.Question words.
Grammar pracrice 4 P.123
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
-Ss work individually- share with
your partner.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
-1 or 2 ss go to the boad then play the
game.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.
- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting
-Ss play in groups ( 2 groups)
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
3.Present simple $ present progressive.
Grammar practice 5 P.123.
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.
- Corrects & comments.
4.Quantifiers.
"lucky number"
1.What does cooking oil come in?
2.What does tea come in?
3.L
4.What does soap come in?
5 What does soda come in?
6.L
7. What does iced tea come in?
8.What do noodles come in?
-T corrects.
-Ss enjoy the game.
-Take notes.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V</b>
<b> .Homework .(2m)</b>
-Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book.
-Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:71+72
- Helps students will be able students will be able to consolidate the
knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11.
I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>
Full name : …………...………
Class :6...
<b>I.</b> <b>Choose the best answers (4ms) </b>
1. Is her hair short ?
-No,it isn’t . It’s ……….
A,short B,long C,black D,yellow 1...
2. Is your mother thin or fat ?
- She is ………..
A, light B,thin C,tall D,heavy 2...
3. Thanh has ………
A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval D,round face 3...
4. What color are her eyes ?
-They’re ……….
A,long B,round C,black D,small 4...
5. I have………..hair.
A,long black B,a long black C,black long D,a black long
5...
6. ………….does he feel ?
A,How B,What C, How much D, How many 6...
7. ………you like noodles?
A,What B,Are C,Would D,Which 7...
8. I’m ………..I’d like some fish and rice
A, cold B, hot C, hungry D, thirsty 8...
9. What would you like …………dinner?
A,in B,on C,at D,for 9...
10.There aren’t ……….apples on the table
A,any B,some C,a D,an 10...
11.Can I ……… you?
A,have B,help C,has D,do
11...
12.How ………..milk do you want?
A,many B,much C,some D,any 12...
13.I’d like ……….bananas,please.
A,any B,some C,an D,a 13...
14.How many oranges do you want?
A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen D,A kilos 14...
15.Can I help you ?
A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle 15...
16. A fried rice ……….2,500d
A, is B,are C, do D ,does 16...
<b>II. Put </b><i><b>a/an/some/any</b></i><b> (1m)</b>
1. There is ……….. bar of soap. 1: ...
2. I’d like ………….apple. 2: ...
3. Is there ……….. milk ? 3: ...
4. There are ………..bananas 4:...
<b>III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)</b>
green head toe chicken Face
black finger egg red
1. Color :………
2. Body : <i>toe,</i> ………..
3. Food :………..
<b>IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket (1,5 ms)</b>
1. He ………..( ride ) his bike everyday.
2. Lan ……….( watch ) television now
3. You can ………..(park ) here
4. My father...(walk-not) to school everyday, he ...(go)
to school by motorbike.
5. They...(wait) for a bus at the moment.
<b>V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms)</b>
1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ?
1………
2. How / beef/ he / want ?
2………...
3. How/ oranges/ she / want?
3...
<i><b>THE END</b></i>
- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>
<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>I.Choose the best answers (4ms) /Time: 10m</b>
<b>1.Is her hair short ?</b>
-No,it isn’t . It’s ……….
A,short B,long C,black
D,yellow
2. Is your mother thin or fat ?
- She is ………..
A, light B,thin C,tall
D,heavy
3. Thanh has ………
A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval
D,round face 3...
4. What color are her eyes ?
-They’re ……….
A,long B,round C,black
D,small
5. I have………..hair.
A,long black B,a long black C,black long
D,a black long
6. ………….does he feel ?
A,How B,What C, How much D, How
many
7. ………you like noodles?
A,What B,Are C,Would
D,Which
8. I’m ………..I’d like some fish and rice
A, cold B, hot C, hungry
D, thirsty
- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Key:
9. What would you like …………dinner?
A,in B,on C,at
D,for
10.There aren’t ……….apples on the table
A,any B,some C,a
D,an
11.Can I ……… you?
A,have B,help C,has
D,do
12.How ………..milk do you want?
A,many B,much C,some
D,any 12...
13.I’d like ……….bananas,please.
A,any B,some C,an
D,a
14.How many oranges do you want?
A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen
D,A kilos
15.Can I help you ?
-………..of cooking oil,please.
A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle
16. A fried rice ……….2,500d
A, is B,are C, do D ,does
16...
<b>II. Put </b><i><b>a/an/some/any</b></i><b> (1m) /Time: 5m</b>
1.There is ……….. bar of soap. 1: ...
2.I’d like ………….apple. 2: ...
3.Is there ……….. milk ? 3: ...
4.There are ………..bananas 4:...
<b>III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)/ Time: 5m</b>
green head toe chicken Face
black finger egg red
1.Color :………
2.Body : <i>toe,</i> ………..
3.Food :………..
- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer
1.A 2.AN 3.ANY
4.SOME
- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Key:
<b>IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket </b>
<b>(1,5 ms) /Time: 10m</b>
1. He ………..( ride ) his bike everyday.
2. Lan ……….( watch ) television now
3. You can ………..(park ) here
4. My father...(walk-not) to school
everyday, he ...(go) to school by motorbike.
5. They...(wait) for a bus at the moment.
<b>V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms) /Time: 10m</b>
1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ?
2. How / beef/ he / want ?
3. How/ oranges/ she / want?
- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.
- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Key:
1.rides 2.is watching 3.park
4.doesn’t walk /goes
5.are waiting
Key:
1.What would she like for
dinner?
2.How much beef does he
want?
3.How many oranges does
she want?
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>
-T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this lesson.
<b>V</b>
<b> .Homework .(2m)</b>
-Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book.
-Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2
<b>VI.Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:73+74
<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>A.What are they doing? </b>
<b>A.Objectives: </b>
Helps Ss to practice in Present Progressive & sport vocabulary. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what people are doing now.
I.Knowledge:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> </b>Jumbled words.
<i><b>-</b></i> Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the
correct words.
Torps = sport; bolfatol = football; belvalylol = volleyball;
Mage = game; sucim = music; lietoseniv = television
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.
<i>(to) swim; (to) play badminton; </i>
<i>(to) jog; (to) do aerobics;</i>
(to) skip; (to) play table tennis;.
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.
- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Dictation list:
- Presents the words & the table then asks Ss
to listen & put the words into the correct
column.
- Asks Ss to compare & giving their list.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
* Teacher reads:
play football; jog; do aerobics; play tennis;
3. Presentation dialogue: A1-P124.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the example
exchange.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>- </i>Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.
- Working in individual to list.
2 people 1 person
- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
II.PRACTICE Time 10 M
4. Picture drill: A1-P124.
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
<i>S1: What are they doing? </i>
<i>S2: They’re playing soccer.</i>
<i>S1: What is She / he doing ?</i>
<i> S2: She / he skipping.</i>
III.Further practice Time: 10 M
5. Noughts & Crosses:
-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
groups to choose the picture & make the
question & the answer.
- Corrects & comments.
- Working in groups to choose the cue &
make the question & the answer.
*Example exchange:
<i>S1: Picture C.</i>
<i>S1: What are they doing? </i>
<i> S2: They’re playing soccer.</i>
Picture C <i>Picture A</i> <i>Picture B</i>
<i>Picture F</i> <i>Picture D</i> <i>Picture E</i>
<i>Picture H</i> <i>Picture G</i> <i>Picture I</i>
TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS
I.PRE-READING Time: 5 M.
1. Open predict:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to predict what sport Lan &
- Asks Ss to give their prediction.
- Comments their prediction.
- Working in pairs to predict what sport Lan
& Nam like (3 each ).
- Giving Their Prediction.
Lan Nam
<i>1.</i>
<i>2.</i>
<i>3.</i>
<i>1.</i>
<i>2.</i>
<i>3.</i>
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M
2. Presentation text. A4-P126.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text
about Nam & Lan & get the details.
- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects comments.
- Reading the text.
- Checking their prediction.
3. Comprehension questions:
- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects.
III.POST- READING Time: 15 M
4. Picture drill: A3-P125.
- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
-Giving the answers & correcting.
* Questions:
<i>a. Which sport does Lan play ?</i>
<i>b. Does Lan play tennis ?</i>
<i>c. Which sport does Nam play ?</i>
<i>d. Does Nam play table tennis ?</i>
* Answers:
<i>a. Lan swim, does aerobics & play</i>
<i>badminton.</i>
<i>b. No, she doesn’t.</i>
<i>c. Nam plays soccer, table tennis, & jogs. </i>
<i>d, Yes, he does.</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups with teacher & in
closed pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Survey:
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask each other about the
sports they do & fill the information into the
table.
- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.
- Comments S’s information.
* Example exchange:
<i> S1: Which sport do you do ?</i>
<i> S2: I [ play soccer ] & [ swim ].</i>
- Working in pairs to ask each other about the
sport they do & filling the information into
the table.
- Comparing& reporting the information.
* Example exchange:
<i> S1: Which sport do you do ?</i>
<i> S2: I swim.</i>
<i> S1: What else ?</i>
<i> S2: I play volleyball.</i>
<i> S1: Do you play table tennis ?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do.</i>
<i>Name</i> Sport
<i>Hoa</i> <i>Swim</i> <i>volleyball</i> <i>Table tennis</i>
<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2</b>
- Study the vocabulary & exchange.
- Exercise: 3-4-P104- workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 127& what you do in your free times.
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:75+76
<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>B.Free time </b>
<b>A.Objectives: </b>
- Helps Ss to write a short text about what they do in their free time. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to write a short text about what they do in their free time.
I.Knowledge:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
II.Skill:
Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)</b>
-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>
Guessing game.
I……..in my free time * Example:
S1: Do you play ….in your free time ?
S2: No, I don’t.
S1: Do you watch TV ?
S2: No, I don’t
- Introduces the words & helps Ss to
practice in two groups.
- Comments the game.
<b> III. New lesson</b> :
<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>
I.PRE-WRITING Time: 20
M.
1.Vocabulary:
(to) go fishing;
(to) go to the movie.
- Introduces the words by
explaining the meaning,
using the pictures on P78/79.
- Reads the words for the
modal (3 times ). Then helps
Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in
individual & corrects the
mistakes.
- Checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy
the words.
2. Picture drill: B1-P127.
- Introduces the example
exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.
- Reads the first modal for
example & asks Ss to repeat
in chorus & in individual.
- Practices with Ss & checks
S’s practicing in groups & in
pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation
& comments.
3. Transformation writing
-B1-P127.
- Introduces the requirement
& asks Ss to work in pairs to
change “ I “ to the name of
people in the pictures.
- Asks Ss to compare & give
their writing.
- Corrects & comments.
pronunciation.
- Copying the words.
- Repeating in chorus & in
individual.
- Making sentences for the
next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in
pairs.
- Correcting the
pronunciation.
*Example exchange:
S1: What does Phuong do in
his free time?
S2: He goes to the movie.
- Working in pairs to change
“ I “ to the name of people in
the pictures.
- Comparing & giving their
writing.
* Answer :
a. Phuong goes to the
movie.
b. Ly watches TV
c. Nam reads
d. Lan listens to music.
e. Tuan goes fishing.
f. Long play video
games.
II.WHILE-WRITING
Time: 15 M
4. Pyramid:
- Introduces the requirement
& asks Ss to work in
individual to write 3 things
about what they do in their
free time & put all their
sentences together on a
poster.
- Working in individual to
write 3 things about what
they do in their free time &
putting all the sentences
together on a poster.
- Asks Ss to report their
information.
- Comments.
* Example:
+ Individual writing:
( San writes ) I watch TV, I
go fishing & I play football.
( Thuy writes ) I watch TV, I
go to the park & I play
badminton.
( Chinh writes ) I listen to
music, I play football & I
watch TV.
* Groups writing (poster).
San, Thuy & Chinh watch Tv
San & Chinh play football
San goes fishing
Thuy goes to the part & ply badminton
Chinh listens to music
<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision : </b>
<b>Wordsquare </b>
_ Asks Ss to find out vocab
from wordsquare
F
A
L
L
C
O
L
D
X
W
A
R
M
N
S
S
G
N
I
R
P
S
U
E
O
N
L
N
Ss work in individually to
find out vocab from
wordsquare
Listen to the tape to correct
their precdictions
-Ss listen and then practice in
pairs
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in pairs to practice
following example exchange:
S1:What weather do you/
they like?
<b>S</b>2 : I / Theylike [hot]
weather
Work in pairs to make the dia
Example:
S1: What is the weather like
M
A
T
H
S
I
T
S
M
S
C
O
O
L
K
E
E
O
W
E
A
T
H
E
R
<i><b>Answer keys </b></i>
<b>: </b>Spring
<b>: </b>go, got, me,
sea,on,summer,season
<b>: </b>
fall,cold,warm,cool,weather
<b>2 Presentation:A3 P 135</b>
-T reads the text ,then asks
Ss to practice
<b>Model sentences :</b>
What
weather do you like?
<b> </b>I like
hot weather
What is the
weather like today ?
<b> </b>It’s cold
<b>3. Practice : Picture drill/ </b>
<b>Word cue drill</b>
<b> A3 </b>
<b>P135</b>
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs
following example exchange:
S1 : What
weather do you/ they like?
S1: What is the weather like
in Can tho?
S2: It’s hot
S1: What weather do you
like?
<b>S</b>2 : I like cold weather
S1: come to Ha noi
S2: What weather do you
like?
<b> S</b>2 : I /Theylike
[hot] weather
a.She /like/ hotweather
b. I /like /cool
c. Huy/like/ warm
<b>4. Further practice :</b>
<b>Mapped dialogue:</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to make the dia
Can tho
....Hanoi?
...cold
.
.. Can tho ?
...hot
...like?
...cold .
...hanoi?
...like?
...hot...
....can tho
<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:
Asks Ss to write the model sentences.
<b>V. Homework:</b>
Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 3
Do ex 2,3 P 108 (work book)
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:78+79+80
<b> </b>
<b>Unit 13. activities and the seasons</b>
<b>A.The weather and seasons.</b>
<b>A Objective</b>:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to use ‘’when ‘’ clauses in positive statements and
‘’Wh’’ questions
<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges : </b>What questions
<b> II. Skill</b>: Speaking
<b>B. Procedures :</b>
<b> I. Settlement</b>
Greeting
Check attandence
<b>II.Checking : </b>
Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues :
She/like/ hot
<b>. </b> III. New lesson:
<b>Teacher</b>’<b>s activities</b> <b>Students</b>’<b> activities</b>
<b>1 Presentation:</b>
<b>Networks </b>go for a walk listen to music
read a book watch TV fly kites
<b> </b>
play soccer<b> Pastimes </b>go swimming
<b>Predict </b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to predict what Ba does when it’s hot/ cold/
cool/warm
<b>Answer keys :</b>
a. when it’s hot He goes camping.
<b>b.</b> when it’s cold he plays soccer
<b>c.</b> when it’s cool he goes jogging
<b>d.</b> when it’s warm he goes fishing
<b>Presentation Text : A4 P136</b>
-T reads the text ,then asks Ss to read and check their
predictions .
<b>Model sentences :</b>
what does Ba do when it’s hot?
Do you
He goes swimming .
I go
<b>3. Practice : Word cue drill</b>
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example
exchange:
S1 : When it’s cold do you jog?
<b> S</b>2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t
a.cold / go jogging ?
b. cool/ do aerobics?
c. hot / go swimming?
d. warm / go to the park?
<b>4. Further practice :</b>
<b>Transformation writing:</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to change the text about Ba to write about
themselves ,using ‘I’ following example :
when it’s hot I ...
when it’s cold .I....
when it’s cool.I...
when it’s warm I...
- Then Asks Ss to swap their writing on the board , read
their‘s partner’s text then write about their partner,using
He/She
Ss work in individually to write
vocab
- go joging , go fishing , play
badmimton
- do aerobics, go camping
Listen to the text, then read to
correct their precdictions
-Copy down the model
sentences
Work in pairs to practice
following example exchange:
S1 : When it’s cold do you
jog?
<b> S</b>2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t
Work in pairs to change the
text about Ba to write about
themselves ,using ‘I’ following
example :
when it’s hot I ...
when it’s cold ...
when it’s cool...
when it’s warm ...
example :
when it’s hot She ...
when it’s cold he...
when it’s cool. she...
when it’s warm he...
<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:
Asks Ss to write the model sentences.
<b>V. Homework:</b>
Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 4
Do ex 4 P. 111 (work book)
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:81+82
<b>Unit 13. activities and the seasons</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in advs of frequency, </b>
<b>Simple present , sports vocabulary,season</b>
<b>I, Knowledges</b>: sports, seasons vocabulary
advs of frequency
<b>II,Skills:</b> Speaking
<b>III,Preperation: </b>
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
<b>B.Procedures</b>:
<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking</b>. Check the form
What do you do whene it's hot?
<b> </b>III,New lesson:
-<b>1 Matching </b>:
-Asks SS to match
<b> </b>
<b>x</b>
never
always
Work in individually to
match
often
usually
sometimes
<b>2 Presentation:</b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:
(to) play basketball:
( to) go sailing:
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : What and Where</b>
play basketball go sailing
<b> cold hot warm weather</b>
Presentation : B1 P 138
<b>-</b>Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text
<b>2.Practice:</b> <b>Answer given:</b>
<b>Asks Ss to make questions for the answer</b>
<b>a. We often play volleyball?</b>
<b>b. They sometimes go sailing </b>
<b>c. I often go swimming </b>
<b>d. She usually plays badminton</b>
<b>e. We always play basketball</b>
Answer given:
<b> a.What do you do in the spring?</b>
<b> b. What do they do in the fall?</b>
<b> c. What do you do in the summer ?</b>
<b> d.What does do in the fall?</b>
<b> e.What do you do in the winter? </b>
3 Production :
Lucky Numbers
<b>-Asks Ss to play the game by answer the questions</b>
<b>1</b>
<b>2</b>
<b>3</b>
<b>4</b>
<b>10</b>
<b>11</b>
<b>12</b>
<b>5</b>
notebooks
Work in groups to play this
game
Listen and practice the text
Work in individually to
make the
<b>questions for the answers </b>
Then share with their parter
in pairs
Work in groups to answer
the questions
<b>9</b>
<b>8</b>
<b>7</b>
<b>6</b>
<b>1 What is the weather like in winter ?</b>
<b>2 What do you usually do in the winter?</b>
<b>3 What do you usually eat in the winter?</b>
<b>4 LN</b>
<b>5 What is the weather like in the spring ?</b>
<b>6 LN</b>
<b>7 Where do you usually go in the summer ?</b>
<b>8 What weather do you like ?</b>
<b>9 What fruit do you like ?</b>
<b>10 LN </b>
<b>11 What is the weather like in the fall ?</b>
<b>12 What sports do you do in the winter?</b>
-<b>1 Pre-Writing:</b>
*Brainstorm : <b>watch TV</b>
Activities
summer and seasons winter
play in the park go swimming go jogging
hot winter
Board drill : B2 P. 139
<b>-A</b>sks Ss to practice the structure
<b>S1 : </b>What do you do in the summer ?
S2 : I often play tennis
<b>Survey :</b>
Asks SS to fill in the table by asking and answering follwing
example:
Name
Season
Weather
usuallygo
usuallydo
usually
Hoai
fall
cool
The
mountains
Go camping
A picnic hot drink
S1; Which season do you like ?
S2;: Fall
<b>Work in groups to </b>
<b>write vocab</b>
Work in pairs to
practice the structure
<b>S1 : </b>What do you do in
the summer ?
S2 : I often [ play tennis
]
Work in pairs to ask
and answer follwing
example
S1: What's the weather do you like in the fall
S2: It's cool
S1: Where do you usually do you go ?
S2: to the mountains
S1: What do you usually do there ?
S2: I go camping with my friends
S1: What do you usually eat or drink ?
S2 We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot drinks
Write it up:
- Asks SS to write about the friends following example
Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually goes
camping
<b>...</b>
Work in groups to write
about the friends
following example
Hoai likes the fall
whene the weather is
cool.She usually goes
camping
IV Consolidation:
<b> Check the vocab</b>
<b>V. Homework:</b>
12 Do ex 4
- Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 1 A1-3 (P 140-14
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:83+84
<b>Unit14. making plans</b>
<b>A.</b>
-By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk vacation plans
-By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the details text and practice
‘’going to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally.
<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> ’going to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after
that, finally.
<b>I, Knowledges</b>: ''going to , positive statements and Wh 'questions
<b>II,Skills:</b> Speaking
<b>III,Preperation: </b>
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
<b>B.Procedures</b>:
<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking</b>. Check the form
What do you do when it's hot?
<b> </b>III,New lesson:
-1<b> Presentation:</b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:
the summer vacation ( translation) : kú nghØ hÌ
the citadel (picture): thµnh néi
(to) stay with ( someone): ë víi ai
(to) stay for ( aweek/a day): ë bao nhiêu ngày
my uncle (example): chú ,bác tôi
my aunt (example): cô, dì tôi
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and
stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : Ordering vocabulary A 1 p 140</b>
<b>-</b>T reads the text aloud
Answer keys :
1 the summer vacation 4(to) stay for ( aweek/a
day
6 the citadel 6 my uncle
3 (to) stay with someone 5 my aunt 2 (to )
visit
Presentation dialogue : A1 P 140
<b>-</b>Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text
<b>- </b>Then asks some questions
Visit Hue , with her aunt and uncle, one a week ,
visit the citadel
<b>Model sentences </b>:
What are you going to do ?
I'm going to visit Hue
She's stay for a week
<b>2.Practice:</b>
Work Cue Drill:
Asks Ss to make questions follwing example
exchange :
S1: What are you going do this summer ?
S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ]
3 Further practice :
Find S.O who
-Asks Ss to play the game following example
exchange :
S1: This summer vacation , are you going to [ stay at
S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not
Find someone who is going to
<b> Name </b>
<b>,, stay at home</b>
<b>... visit an aunt or uncle </b>
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in individually to listen to
the text to order vocab
Listen and practice the text
Work in individually
answers questions
Copy down the form
Work in pairs to answer following
example exchange :
S1: What are you going do this
summer ?
S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ]
<b>... visit a new city</b>
<b>...stay in a hotel</b>
<b>.. camp in the mountais</b>
<b>..stay in a tent </b>
<b>2007</b>
<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1. Pre- reading</b>
<b>Pre-teach</b>
- The beach (example )
- A temple ( picture)
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : Matching </b>
Asks Ss to match the word in the column A with the word in
the column B
A B
Ha long bay
Hue
Ben thanh market
Nha trang
The beach
HCM city
The citadel
Quang ninh
Ngoc son temple
Ha noi
Ordering :
-T says : Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places
you’ve matched in the summer vacation
<b>1 2 3 4 5</b>
<b>2. While </b>–<b>reading :</b>
<b> A4 - P 142</b>
-Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text ,
then asks Ss to fill in the correct order in the column one of the
gird below with answer keys
Places to visit
Where to stay
-Ss listen and repeat in
chorus and then
individually
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in groups to
play this game
Ss listen and order the
places
Read the text to check
their order the places
and practice the text
Then fill in the
correct order in the
column one of the
gird below in
How long
What to do
First
Then
Next
After that
finally
Ha long
Ha noi
Hue
Nha trang
HCM
<b>4. Post reading :</b>
<b>TRansformation writing:</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to change information from the text on P.142 change
Phuong and Mai to “ I” and replacecing their vacation plan
with the student’s own plans
<b>Keys</b> : I ...
P.142 change Phuong
and Mai to “ I” and
replacecing their
vacation plan with the
<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:
Asks Ss to write vocabulary.
<b>V. Homework:</b>
Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 2
Do ex 3 P 114 (work book)
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:85+86
<b>Unit 14 :making plans</b>
<b>B. Free time plans</b>
<b>A Objective</b>:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further speaking to talk about plans for the near
future
<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further listening and reading practice with
'going to<b> ' </b>
<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> ‘’going to ‘’ future
<b> II. Skill</b>: Speaking
<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>
<b> I. Settlement</b>
Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1.Review </b>
<b>Finding friends :(</b>with answer keys<b> )</b>
Asks Ss to complete the table following example exchange :
S1: What are you going to do tomorrow?
S2: I’m going to [do my homework]
homework
My friend
A soocer match
A movie
badminton
My mon
walking
See
Play
Do
Visit
Help
Go
watch
<b>2 Practice :</b>
Predict dialogue :
-Asks Ss to predict the dialogue
Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?
Lan: I;m going to ...
Tuan : What are you going to do tomorrow ?
Lan: It’s Sunday .I’m going to ...Then we’re going
to ...what about you?
Work in individually
to complete the table
following example
exchange :
S1: What are you
going to do
tomorrow?
S2: I’m going to [do
Work in pairs to
predict the dialogue
Ss copy down the
dialogue and Then fill
in the gaps in pairs
then practice the dia
in pairs
Work in groups to
play this game
<b>Example exchange :</b>
S1: On Sunday
morning I’m going to
go shopping
S2: On Sunday
Tuan : Tonight , I’m going to ... tomorrow, I’m going to...
Mapped dialogue
B2 P 144
-Asks Ss to make the dialogue
<b>Example exchange :</b>
.... tonight ? ...see a movie
. . ... tonight ?
...help my Mom
...tomorrow? ... go walking
. ...tomorrow?
..play volleyball
S1: What are you going to do tonight ?
S2: I;m going to see a movie .What are you going to do tonight ?
S1: I;m going to help my mom .What are you going to ?
S2: ect...
<b>4.Chain game :</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to practice in pairs ,using the sentences
<b>Example exchange :</b>
S1: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping
S2: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping and on Sunday
afternoon I’m going watch TV.
-1<b> Review :</b>
<b>Survey </b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to practice the structure
<b> </b>What are you going to do ....
name
tonight
On Sunday
On Saturday
In the summer vacation
me
<b>2 Pre -reading </b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:
(to ) bring ( translation): mang
(to ) take a photo (mime): chơp ¶nh
a camera ( picture/ realia): máy ảnh
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : what and where</b>
Bring take a photo a camera
Pre questions
<b>-</b>T says : Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic
1 Where are they going to ?
Work in pairs to practice
the structure
<b> </b>What are you going to
do ?
Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, in
individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups tp play
this game
Work in individually to
these answer questions
2 What three things are they going to bring ?
3 What are they going to there?
3 While -reading :
_T reads the text ,asks Ss to read to check their prediction
Answer keys :
1 .near a lake 2 .a camera , food and drink 3. take a photos
4 Pre-listening:
Brainstorm
Things to bring for
a camping vacation
-Then asks Ss to predict these things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga
bring
Vui a ball
Ly a camera
Lan some food
Mai some drink
Nga a tent
5 While-listening :
B6 P.145
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to listen to the tape to check their prediction
Answer keys :
Vui: a tent ,some food
Ly : a camera
Lan : a ball
Mai and Nga : some drink
:
the text
Work in individually
To write vocabulary
A tent ,a kite , food ....
Then predict these things
Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga
bring
Work in pairs to listen to
the tape to check their
prediction
<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
<b>V, Homework:</b>
15 Do ex 3,4 P 115
16 Prepare Lesson 5
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
Teaching date:………
Period:87
Unit14.making plans
<b>C. Suggestions</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to make suggestions with ‘Let’s..’’ and respond,
further practice in ‘want to (do)<b> ' </b>
<b>I Knowledges</b>: '‘Let’s..’’ ‘want to (do) ' .
<b>II Skills:</b> Speaking
<b>III Preperation: </b>
<b>B.Procedures</b>:
<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking</b>. AsksSs to write vocabulary
<b> </b>III,New lesson:
<b>1 Presentation :</b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:
by minibus ( example) : b»ng xe buýt nhá
a pagoda ( picture): chïa
too ( synonym very ) : rÊt
too far ( example ) : rÊt xa
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check : ROR</b>
by minibus a pagoda too far
<b>Pre questions </b>
<b>-T says : </b>Ba,Lan and Nam are going to have a picnic
1 Where are they going to go ?
2 How are they going to travel?
_T reads the dialogue ,asks Ss to check their prediction
<b>Answer keys</b> :
1 Huong pagoda 2 by minibus
_Asks Ss to answer the questions C2 P .148 in the text book
<b>Answer keys :</b>
a Nam wants to go to Hue
b Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda
c Lan wants to walk
d Because it’s too far
e By bike
f Because it’s too hot
g Ba wants to travel by minibus
Model sentences :
-17 Let’s go camping
Walk there
-18 That’s a good idea
<b>2 Practice : Picture drill </b>
<b> </b>C3 a-f P.148-149 with work cue Yes/no
Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange
S1: Let’s go to the beach
S2: That’s a good idea/ No I dont’ want to
<b>3 Production :</b>
<b>Mapped dialogue </b>
<i>You Your friend </i>
See a movie no..go to the beach
Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, in
individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups tp play
this game
Work in individually to
answer these questions
Listen and check their
prediction ,then practice
the dialogue
Work in pair to answer
the questions
Listen and copy down
Work in pairs to practice
the structure following
example exchange
S1: Let’s go to the beach
S2: That’s a good idea/
No I dont’ want to
No...too hot
Go to the museun Yes ...walk
No..go by minibus Yes
dialogue
<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
<b>V, Homework:</b>
20 Do ex 5 P 115
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:88
<b>Grammar practice</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in Present simple,Adv of
frequency,Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather
<b>I Knowledges</b>: Present simple,Adv of frequency.
Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather .
<b>II Skills:</b> Speaking and writing
<b>III Preperation: </b>
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
<b>B.Procedures</b>:
<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking</b>. AsksSs to write vocabulary
<b> </b>III,New lesson:
<b>1 Present simple:</b>
<b>Survey:</b>
Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange
S1: What sports do you like ?
S2: Football
S1: What sports don’t you like ?
S2: swimming
Like.... ...don’t like...
Name
Sports
Season
Food
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange
S1: What sports do you like ?
S2: Football
S1: What sports don’t you like
?
S2: swimming
Work in individually to write
it upfollowing example
exchange
Drink
Ha
Football
Swimming
-Asks Ss to write it up following example exchange
Ha likes football but she doesn’t like swimming
2 <b>Adv of frequency:</b>
Asks Ss to play the game STB
Lu«n lu«n kh«ng bao giê thỉnh thoảng
hai lần một tuần thờng xuyên một lần trong năm
<b>3</b>
Asks Ss to play the game noughts and crosses following
example exchange
S!: How often do you [go to the movie ]?
S2 : Twice a week
TV? The movies ? the store?
Swimming ? your mom? Fishing?
Table tennis? Caping ? badmonton ?
<b>4 Future going to :</b>‘ ‘’
<b>Picture drill 4 P.151-152 </b>
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange
S1! What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to [ play football
5 <b>Present progressive :</b>
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange
S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6 ]
S2: That’s right but today he is ] [getting up at 7]
a. get up at 6/get up at 7
b. go to school/ go camping
c. have rice for lunch/ have a picnic
<b>6 future plans and the weather </b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to answer the questions
1 Where are you going to do ?
2 Who are you going to with ?
3 What season are you going to go in?
4 What ‘s the weather like then?
5 What are you going to bring with you ?
<b>Example : </b>I’m going to go to Sapa with my friends. We are
going to in the spring .It’s cool but we like cool weather ...
Work in groups to play this
game
Work in groups to play this
game following example
exchange
S!: How often do you [go to
the movie ]?
S2 : Twice a week
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange
S1:What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to [ play
football ]
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange
S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6
]
S2: That’s right but today he is
] [getting up at 7]
Work in individually toanswer
the questions then write a
pharagraph
<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather
<b>V, Homework:</b>
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:89+90
<b>test and check</b>
<b>Objectives</b>: By the end of the lesson , T can check Ss’ understanding and help Ss review the
structures they’ve learned
<b>I . Knowledge</b>: vocab and structures in unit 12-14
<b>II. Skills</b> : writing
<b>III. Preparation</b>: test papers
<b>B. Contents:</b>
<b>I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) </b>
1, How ...do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d, many
5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how
6, Let’s ...to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often
8, He ...TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is
watching
<b>II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m)</b>
1, We...(play) volleyball now.
2, This summer vacation, Hoa ...(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ...Lan...(travel) to school?
4, I usually ...(go ) camping in the summer .
<b>III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):</b>
A B
1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week
4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos
6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold
<b>IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m):</b>
Nga is a teacher,so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First, she is
going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit
Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are
going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.
2, She is going to travel by coach.
3, She is going to visit Da lat for three days.
4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
<b>V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m)</b>
<b>...</b>
...
<b>I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) </b>
1, How ...do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d, many
2, She ...sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They ...playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for
5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how
6, Let’s ...to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often
<b>II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m)</b>
1, We...(play) volleyball now.
2, This summer vacation, Hoa ...(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ... ...Lan...(travel) to school?
4, I usually ...(go ) camping in the summer .
<b>III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):</b>
A B
1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week
4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos
6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold
<b>IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m):</b>
Nga is a teacher, so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First, she is
going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit
Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are
2, She is going to travel by coach.
3, She is going to visit Da Lat for three days.
4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
Pre date:……..
Teaching date:………
Period:91
<b>Unit 15 : countries</b>
A. we are the world
<b>A Objective</b>:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a post card about being on vacation
<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> Countries, nationalities and languages vocabulary<b> </b>
<b>II. Skill</b>: writing
<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>
<b>I. Settlement</b>
Greeting
Check attandence
<b>II.Checking : </b>
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Work cue drill:</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to pratice the structure following example
exchange :
S1: Where is Hoa from ?
S2: She is from Viet nam
S1: What language does she speak ?
S2 : She speaks Viet namese .
a. Hoa/Viet nam
b. Tomiko/ Japan
c. Jo/ Australia
d. John/ Britain
<b>e.</b> Susan/ Canada
<b>2.Pre-writing :</b>
<b>Pre-teach:</b>
A post card (real):
(to )be on vacation (Example ):
wet (example) :
a lot of (synonym: many):
interesting places (example):
T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check: What and where
Work in pairs to pratice
the structure following
example exchange :
S1: Where is Hoa from ?
S2: She is from Viet nam
S1: What language does
she speak ?
S2 : She speaks Viet
namese .
Ss listen and repeat in
chorus and then
individually
Ss copy down on their
notebook
be on vacation wet interesting places
a lot of
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to read the text to answer the questions (with
answer keys a. Who is the post card from ? ( Nhan)
b. Where is he ? ( in london)
c. What is the weather like? (cool and wet
d. Is he travelling by train ? ( no,by bus )
e. Who’s the postcard to ? ( Minh )
Matching
-Asks Ss to put the words into three columns (with answer
keys)
Country City interesting places
Japan Tokyo Mount Fujiama
Viet nam Hue The citadel
<b>2 While-writing :</b>
Transformation writing”
-Asks Ss to write
3 Post –wrting :
Exhibition
-T corrects their mistakes
Work in pairs to read the
text to answer the
questions (with answer
keys
Work in individually to
put the words into three
columns
Work in groups to write
Stick their poster on the
board to correct each
other
<b>V. Consolidation</b>:
Vocabulary
<b>V. Homework:</b>
Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34
Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
<b></b>
---Pre date:……….
Teaching date:…………
Period:92,93
<b>Unit15 countries</b>
B.cities, buildings and people
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
<b>- </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to compare places ,using the comparative and
superrlative adj of one syllable.
<b> - </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to read facts about famous places in the world
<b>II Skills:</b> Speaking
<b>III Preperation: </b>
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book
<b>B.Procedures</b>:
<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence
<b> II,Checking</b>. Asks Ss to write vocabulary
<b>III,New lesson:</b>
<b>1 Revision: Matching</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to choose the adjs which best describe the cities
(a city can have more than one adj
hot Hue
wet HCM city
cold Hoi an
big Sapa
small Ha noi
<b> </b>long xuyen
<b>2 Presentation :</b>
<b>Presentation Text </b>
-Reads the text, asks Ss to practice
<b>Models :</b>
1: Adj + er : smaller, cloder
2: Adj +est : smallest. clodest
<b>Note:</b>
Double last letter +er : thinner, bigger
<b>3 Practice: word cue drill</b>
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange
S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang
S2: But HCM city is the biggest
a. Da nang Ha noi HCM city (big)
b. Ha noi Uong bi Sapa (clod )
c. Vinh Long xuyen Hoi an (small)
d. Ha noi Can tho Hue ( wet)
<b>4 Further practice : Answer given</b>
_T gives the answer asks Ss to make questions with
answer keys
a. Phanxipang What’s the tallest mountain in Viet nam?
b.The Mekong What’s the biggest river in Viet nam?
c. Hue What’s the wettest city in Viet nam?
d. Sapa Whast’s the clodest town in Viet nam?
e. HCM city What’s the biggest city in Viet nam?
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play Noughts and crosses by comparing their
home town with towm in the box
Ha noi Hue Sapa
HCM city Da nang Hoi an
Hai phong Can tho Da lat
Work in individually to
choose the adjs which best
describe the cities (a city can
have more than one adj )
Listen and copy down the
models
Work in pair to practice the
structure following exaple
exchange
S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da
nang
S2: But HCM city is the
biggest
Work in pairs to make
questions
Work in groups to play game
Example :
tri
<b>1 Revision: Lucky numbers </b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play this game by asking and answering
questions
1. What’s the biggest city in Viet nam ? (HCM )
<b>2.</b> What’s the biggest city in Britain? (Lon don)
<b>3.</b> What’s the biggest city in Japan ? ( Tokyo)
<b>4.</b> LN
<b>5.</b> What’s the tallest mountain you know?
<b>6.</b> LN
<b>7.</b> What’s the wettest you know?
<b>8.</b> Which one ‘s colder : Can tho or Sapa?
<b>2 Pre-reading :</b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:
high (example) : cao
long (mime) : dµi
thick (example): dµy
over
a million (translation) : mét triÖu
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually
-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check :</b> Wordsquare
_Asks Ss to find out the words
WETBIGCTHICKLONGERLVOLDXAEDLOCTRH
GH
Keys :
wet, big, thick, long, longer, old, high
over,big, do, no
cool tall cold
Odering:
_Asks Ss to put the cities in order : biggest first
HCM, LONDON, TOKYO, HANOI, MEXICO.
<b>3While-reading :B2 P.159</b>
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their order
<b>Keys : </b>
1-MEXICO, 2-TOKYO,3-LONDON, 4-HCM,
5-HANOI -Asks Ss to answer the questions in B2 P.159
Answer Keys <b>: </b>
a.No,it is not
b.It’s MEXICO
c. Tokyo is bigger than London
<b>4 Post -reading : guess from the cotext</b>
-Asks Ss to look at the text and pictures to guess the
meaning of
1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building
4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure
_
Work in groups to play this
game
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
Listen and repeat in choral, in
groups, in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups to find out the
words
Work in individually to
answer the questions in B2
P.159
Work in individuallylook at
the text to guess the meaning
of
1 a population 2 the capital
city 3 a building
4 kilometers 5 meters
6 a structure
<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
Check vocabulary
<b>V, Homework:</b>
25 Do ex 3 P.129-130
26 Prepare Lesson 5
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
<b></b>
---Pre date:………..
Teaching date:…………
Period:94,95
<b>Unit15 countries</b>
C. natural features
<b>A.Objectives</b>:
<b> - </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be describe Viet nam use “ lots of...” as a quantitier
<b> - </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be understand the text about the world’s great rives and
mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and
superlatives
<b> I Knowledges: </b>Lots of , Geography vocabulary .
<b>II Skills:</b> Speaking and writing
<b>III Preperation: </b>
Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
<b>B.Procedures</b>:
<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play this game by listening and slapping in
the words
beautiful green rivers lakes
beaches fields
mountains
<b>2 Presentation :</b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:
a forest (picture): cánh rừng
a desert ( translation): sa mạc
(to ) rain ( picture ): ma
great (a) (example): vĩ đại ,to lớn
lots of ( synonym: alot of ,many) : nhiều
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually
-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check :</b> R.O.R
-Asks Ss to read the text to answer the question
What are the 6 ‘natural features’ Lan tells us about ?
<b>Keys : </b>
<b> 1 </b>mountains 4 rain
2 rivers 5 forest
3 lakes 6 forest
<b>Model sentences :</b>
We have lots of mountains, rivers, forests.
Rain.
<b>3 Practice : Picture drill </b> C2 P.164
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :
S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of [ mountains ] ?
S2: Yes, it does .
T/F repetition drill:
-Asks Ss to listen and repeat if the sentences which T
reads is right and keep silent if it wrong
Example :
T : There are lots of beaches in Da nang
<b> </b>There are lots of forests in Ha noi
There are lots of lakes in Ha noi
<b>4 Production : Noughts and Crosses</b>
<b>-Asks Ss to </b>practice the structure following example
exchange :
S1: Are there any[ forests] in Viet nam?
S2: Yes/ No, there are.
Mountains rivers forests
Work in groups to play this
game
Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups to play this
game
Work in individually to read
the text to answer the
question
‘’What are the 6 ‘natural
features’ Lan tells us about ?’'
Listen and copy down it
Work in pairsto practice the
structure following example
exchange :
S1 : Does Viet nam have lots
of [ mountains ] ?
S2: Yes, it does .
Listen and repeat if the
sentences which T reads is
right and keep silent if it
wrong
Repeat
silent
Repeat
Work in pairs topractice the
structure following example
exchange :
Beaches rain building
Trees interesting places lakes
Viet nam?
S2: Yes/ No, there are.
<b>1 Revision: Wordsquare</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to find out the words in the box
RIVERSWCMSTARTSHELBEACHITREEIGI
NEIRONEGARGLOTSHISDLROWXF
<b>Answer keys :</b>
great, long world girl
meters, rain, high, China, of, or
river, rivers starts, beach, tree, in, lots , on
<b>2 Pre-reading:</b>
<b>*Pre -teach:</b>
the sea (picture): biển
Tibet ( translation): tây tạng
(to ) flow to ( mime): chả
North Afica: b¾c mü
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word
-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually
-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy
<b>Check :</b> What and Where
the sea Tibet North Afica
<b>T/ F predictions:</b>
-Asks Ss to predict these sentences are T or F
2 The Red river is longer than the Mekong river .
3 The Red river and the Mekong both start in China
4 The longest river in the world os not in Viet nam
5 Phanxipang is the hightest mountain in the world
<b>3While -reading : C3 p.165</b>
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction s
<b>Answer keys </b>: 1T 2F 3F 4 T 5 F
-Asks Ss to read the text again to answer the question
in the text book C3 P. 165
<b>Answer keys </b>
a.The Mekong river
b. The Mekong starts in Tibet
c. The Nile river is the longest in the world
d. The Nile river flow to the Mediterrrannean sea
E Moun Everest is the highest mountain in the world
f Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Viet nam
<b>4 Post-reading : Lucky number</b>
-Asks Ss to play this game by amswering these
questions .
a. LN
b. What are the two great rivers in Viet nam ?
Work in individually to find
out the words
Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, and in
individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks
Work in groups to play this
game
Work in groups to predict
these sentences are T or F
c. Where does the Red river start ?
d. LN
e. What does the Red river flow to ?
f. W hat does the Nile start and flow to ?
g. LN
h. Make a sentences about the lonhest river in Viet
nam?
Work in groups to play the
game
<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
Check vocabulary
<b>V, Homework:</b>
29 Do ex 3 P.130
30 Prepare unit 16 Lesson 1
<b>VI. Evaluation:</b>
...
...
...
...
<b></b>
---Pre date:………
Teaching date:……….
Period:96,97,98
<b>Unit 16 MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT</b>
A. ANIMALS AND PLANTS
<b>A Objective</b>:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about food with countable and uncountable
quantifiers
<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> a lot, a little, a few
<b>II. Skill</b>: speaking
<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>
<b> I. Settlement</b>
<b>II.Checking : </b>
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:
Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Jumble Words:</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the order
toespota <b>= </b>potatoes , gegs = eggs , werflos = flowers
motatoes = tomatoes , icer = ucer , nonios = onions
<b>2.Presentation :</b>
<b>Presentation text : A1 p.166</b>
<b>-</b>Reads the text, asks Ss to listen to the text and practice the
text
Model sentences :
a. How much rice is there ?
<b> </b>There is some
<b> </b>A lot of
<b> </b>A little rice
b. How many eggs are there ?
There are some
Alot of eggs
A few
<b>3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167</b>
- Asks Ss to match the sentences to the
<b>Answer keys</b> : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e
<b>Picture drill</b>:
A1 p.166 and A3 P.167
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :
S 1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions are there ?
S2 : There are a few
<b>4 Production</b> :
Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game
Example : S1 : There is a little rice
S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a
few eggs
Ss listen , and practice
the text ,then give
examples
Ss copy down on their
Work in pairs to match
Work in pairs to to
practice the structure
following example
exchange :
S1: How much ricwe is
there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions
are there ?
S2 : There are afew
Work in groups to play
chain game
Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Noughts and crosses :</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play the game ,use ''There [is a little rice]''
a dozen eggs two potatoes 1/2 a glass of milk
1/2 kilo onions 100 g rice 4 kilos vegetables
1 kilo fruit 2 tomatoes 2 flowers
<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>
<b>Pre-teach</b>
animals (picture):
Work in groups to play the
game ,use ''There [is a little
rice]''
a buffalow (picture):
a cow (picture):
( to ) flow (picture):
(to ) pull a cart (picture):
(to ) grow (picture):
(to ) procedure (picture):
<b>-</b> T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check: Net work
animals
grow on the farm
fruit / rice / vegetables procedure
*<b>open -prediction </b>:
-Asks Ss to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5
things he has procedures with answer keys
Mr Hai has Mr Hai procedures
1 paddy fields rice
2 a small vegetable field vegetables
3 fruit trees fruit
4 buffalow milk
5 cows eggs
6 chickens
<b>3 While -reading:</b>
-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions
<b>3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167</b>
- Asks Ss to match the sentences to the picture
<b>Answer keys</b> : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e
<b>Picture drill</b>:
A1 p.166 and A3 P.167
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :
S 1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions are there ?
S2 : There are afew
<b>4 Production</b> :
Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game
Example : S1 : There is a little rice
S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a
few eggs
and then individually
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in individually to write
vocab
Work in groups to predict 6
things Mr Hai has on his farm
Listen and reads the text to
check their predictions
work in pairs to match the
sentences to the picture
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange :
S1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions are
there ?
S2 : There are a few
Work in groups to play chain
game
<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :matching </b>
the population rõng forests
trång
the world nông dân farmer
grow d©n sè fields
con vËt
food thức ăn animals
thÕ giíi
<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>
<b>Pre-teach</b>
land (picture): đất đai
plants(picture): thực vật
( to )burn (picture): đốt cháy
(to ) destroy( translation): phá huỷ
(to ) cut down (synomyn: grow ): chặt phá
in danger( example): mối nguy hiÓm
<b>-</b> T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check: What and where
land plants burn
destroy in danger cut down
<b>ordering</b>:
-Asks Ss order the words
1.produce 2.cut down 3. more food 4. burn
<b>5</b>. grow 6. make new fields <b>7. </b>animals and plants in
danger.
<b>3 While -reading: A4 p. 168</b>
-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions
<b>Answer keys</b> :
1. Because we grow trees
<b>2.</b> Because we need wood
<b>3.</b> Because we are destroyingthe forests
<b>4 Post -reading : Picture story </b>
Asks Ss to retell story,using their words
Work in groups to match Viet
namese with EL words
Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
Ss copy down on their
notebook
Work in groups to play this
game
Work in groups order the
words
5-3- 2- 6 -1-7
Listen and reads the text to
check their predictions
Then answer the questions
Work in groups to retell
story,using their words
<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:
Vocabulary
<b>V. Homework:</b>
Prepare Unit 16 Lesson4
Do ex (work book)
...
...
...
...
Pre date :………..
Teaching date:………
Period:99,100
<b> </b>
<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>
B. POLLUTION
<b>A Objective</b>:
By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas about the
pollution
<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> pollution vocabulary
<b> II. Skill</b>: reading
<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>
<b>Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence
<b>II.Checking : </b>Asks Ss to write voca
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:
<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :STB</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play this game
phá huỷ đốn cây sản xuất convật
mối nguy hiểm đốt cháy cây đất đai
<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>
<b>Pre-teach</b>
The enviroment (trasnlation): môi trờng
The ocean (synomyn: sea ): đại dơng
( to) pollute (example):oo nhiễm
(to) waste (translation): lảng phí
the air(example): khơng khí
coal( realia): than đá
oil( realia):dầu
gas (translation): ga
power (example ):
<b>-</b> T uses the techniques to elicit each word
T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy
Check: What and where
gas oil coal
Work in groups to match Viet
namese with EL words
Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually
Ss copy down on their
notebook
the air waste ocean power
<b>Pre questions -Predict </b>:
-Asks SS to predict the answers with answer keys
1.What are we destroying ?
- forests, wild animals, plants
2.What are we wasting ?
- water, coal, oil , gas
3. What are we polluting ?
- the air, the land, the rivers, the oceans
<b>3 While -reading: B1 P.169</b>
-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions
<b>Answer keys</b> :
<b>4.</b> a. Because we are destroying
<b>5.</b> b. Gases is polluting the air
<b>6.</b> c.
<b>4 Post -reading : Write it up </b>
-Asks Ss to use the predict pre questions to make a list of ‘’
don’ts ‘’
<b>Example </b>: Don’t destroy our environment
Don’t destroy the forest
Don’t destroy the plants
<b> </b> Don’t destroythe wild animals
Don’t waste water
Don’t pollute the air
Don’t pollute the oceans
Work in groups to predict the
answers
Listen and reads the text to
check their predictions
Then answer the questions
Work in groups to use the
predict pre questions to make
a list of ‘’ don’ts ‘
<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :Noughts and crosses </b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play this game by using ‘’Don’t ...’’
plants water the air
power wild animals the oceans
forests coal trash
Example : Don’t destroy plants
<b>2.Presentation :B2 P.170-171</b>
-Reads the text , asks Ss to guess the new words from
context with answer keys
(to) throw = nÐm
(to) pick = nhặt
(to) damage= phá huỷ, làm hỏng
(to) keep off = tránh khái
(to) save = tiÕt kiÖm
(to) collect = thu gom
-Asks Ss to match the rulres with these signs
<b>Answer keys :</b>
a- picture c b- picture f c- picture a d- picture h
e- picture e f- picture b g - pictureg h- picture d
Work in groups to play this
game by using ‘’Don’t ...’’
Example : Don’t destroy
plants
Ss listen and guess the new
words from context
*Model sentences :
We should collect paper
Save water
We shouldn’t throw trash on the streets
damage trees.
<b>3 Practice: </b>
-Asks Ss to match and write these sentences with should
and shouldn’t
<b>7. Example :</b>
8. We should collect paper
Should damage trash
9. collect trees
10. throw paper
Shouldn’t save flowers
11. pick bottles and cans
<b>Picture drill </b>:
-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
S1: We shouldn’t [ damage trees ]
S2: That’s right
<b>4 Further practice : Noughts and crosses </b>
-Asks Ss to play this game
damage save waster
destroy pollute collect
throw cut down pick
Example : We should/shouldn’t ....
Listen and copy donw the
sentences
Work in individually to match
and write these sentences with
should and shouldn’t
We should collect paper
We shouldn’t throw trash
Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
S1: We shouldn’t [ damage
trees ]
S2: That’s right
Work in groups to play this
game
<b>Teacher</b>’<b>s activities</b> <b>Students</b>’<b> activities</b>
<b>1. Countries and Languages:</b>
<b>*Simple present :</b>
<b>-</b>T recalls the way to use this tense
Form: S + V-s/es
Uses: miêu tả hành động thờng xuyên xãy ra
Countries and Languages
Japanese
Japan
-Ask ss to do exercise 1p.174 (text book)
Answerkey:
a.Are... from/ Am not/ speak
b.Speaks
c.Is Chinese e.Is Vietnamese
d.Is Japanese f.Is American
<b>2.Present simple and present progressive:</b>
+Mapped dialouge:
<b>...name</b>? Susan
...Live ? London
...Stay now? Hanoi
...teach you? No, ...Mr Hai
T-Whole class
Work in groups to to do
exercise 1p.174 (text book)
Answer key:
1.What is her name?
2.Where does she live?
3.Where is she staying now?
4.What does she do?
5.What does she teach?
6.Does she teach you?
-ask ss to do the exercise 2 P.174 (text book)
<b>3.Adj: Comparative and superlatives:</b>
-Asks Ss to complete the table and then complete the
passages.
Long
Longer
Longest
a. The Mekong river is long. The Amazon river is
...than the Mekong. The Nile river is...river in the
world.
b. The Great Wall of China is long. It is... ... structure
in the world
c. Sears Tower in Chicago is tall, but it isn’t .... ...
building in the world. Petronas twin Tower in Kuala
Lumpur is .... than Sears Tower. It is ... ... building in
the world.
d. Ha noi is big, but it is not the .... city in Viet nam.
HCMC is ... than Hanoi. It is ... city in VietNam. But
Mexico city is.. ...city in the world.
Work in individually to
complete the table and then
complete the passages.
<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:
Vocabulary